B90man c2

g
B90 Revision: 3.0x
GE Industrial Systems
B90 Bus Differential Relay UR Series Instruction Manual
Manual P/N: 1601-0115-C2 (GEK-106241A) Copyright 2002 GE Multilin
836771A1.CDR
GE Multilin
IS T E R E
D
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512 Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
EG
Manufactured under an ISO9000 Registered system.
g
ADDENDUM
GE Industrial Systems
This Addendum contains information that relates to the B90 relay, version 3.0x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-106241A (revision C2) but are not included in the current B90 operations. The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the B90 relay: N/A
The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the object models described in Appendix C: UCA/MMS PROTOCOL.
NOTE
GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512 Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.5.8 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5 CONNECTING URPC WITH THE B90 ............................................................ 1-6 MOUNTING AND WIRING................................................................................. 1-8 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 1-8 FACEPLATE DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 1-8 FACEPLATE KEYPAD....................................................................................... 1-9 MENU NAVIGATION ......................................................................................... 1-9 MENU HIERARCHY .......................................................................................... 1-9 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-10 BATTERY TAB................................................................................................. 1-10 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-10 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-10 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-10
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.3 URPC SOFTWARE
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.5 USING THE RELAY
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-7 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-11 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-11 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-11 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-12 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-12 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-12 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-13 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-13 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-14 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-14 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-14 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-14 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-14
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
3. HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-2 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-3 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 3-4 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................................................. 3-9 CONTROL POWER ......................................................................................... 3-10 CT/VT MODULES ............................................................................................ 3-11 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ....................................................................... 3-12 RS232 FACEPLATE PROGRAM PORT.......................................................... 3-18 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................................................... 3-18 IRIG-B .............................................................................................................. 3-20
3.2 WIRING
GE Multilin
B90 Bus Differential Relay
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS

3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-21 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-23 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-23 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-24 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-27 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-30 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-30
4. HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 URPC SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE.......................................................................4-1 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1 URPC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW......................................................................4-1 URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW ...............................................................4-3 FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-4 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .........................................................................4-6 CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE ..........................................................4-6 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-7 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-7 MENU NAVIGATION ..........................................................................................4-8 MENU HIERARCHY ...........................................................................................4-8 CHANGING SETTINGS .....................................................................................4-9
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
5. SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-3 B90 FUNCTION ..................................................................................................5-4 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-5 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-6 COMMUNICATIONS ..........................................................................................5-7 MODBUS USER MAP ....................................................................................5-14 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-14 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-15 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-17 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-20 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-20 DIRECT I/O.......................................................................................................5-22 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-26 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-27 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................5-27 FLEXCURVES ..............................................................................................5-28 BUS ZONE .......................................................................................................5-35 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC................................................................5-37 FLEXLOGIC RULES .....................................................................................5-42 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-42 FLEXLOGIC PROCEDURE EXAMPLE ........................................................5-42 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR................................................................5-47 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ...................................................................................5-47 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ..............................................................................5-48 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................5-49 SETTING GROUP ............................................................................................5-49 BUS DIFFERENTIAL ........................................................................................5-49 BREAKER FAILURE ........................................................................................5-54
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
ii
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9 5.7.10 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 END FAULT PROTECTION............................................................................. 5-62 CURRENT ELEMENTS ................................................................................... 5-64 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................... 5-71 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-73 SETTING GROUPS ......................................................................................... 5-73 DIGITAL ELEMENTS....................................................................................... 5-74 MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 5-77 CT TROUBLE .................................................................................................. 5-78 ISOLATOR MONITORING............................................................................... 5-79 CONTACT INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-82 VIRTUAL INPUTS............................................................................................ 5-84 CONTACT OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-85 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 5-85 REMOTE DEVICES ......................................................................................... 5-86 REMOTE INPUTS............................................................................................ 5-87 REMOTE OUTPUTS: DNA BIT PAIRS............................................................ 5-88 REMOTE OUTPUTS: USERST BIT PAIRS..................................................... 5-89 RESETTING..................................................................................................... 5-89 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 5-90 TEST MODE .................................................................................................... 5-93 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................ 5-93 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................ 5-93
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
5.8 TESTING
6. ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.5.1 6.5.2 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-2 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-2 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-3 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 6-3 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS ............................................................................ 6-3 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ..................................................................... 6-4 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-4 ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-4 DIRECT INPUTS................................................................................................ 6-5 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS.............................................................................. 6-5 METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................................................. 6-6 BUS.................................................................................................................... 6-7 CURRENTS ....................................................................................................... 6-7 VOLTAGES........................................................................................................ 6-7 FREQUENCY..................................................................................................... 6-7 EVENT RECORDS ............................................................................................ 6-8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ............................................................................................ 6-8 MODEL INFORMATION .................................................................................... 6-9 FIRMWARE REVISIONS ................................................................................... 6-9
6.2 STATUS
6.3 METERING
6.4 RECORDS
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 MENU................................................................................................................. 7-1 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 7-1 CLEAR RECORDS ............................................................................................ 7-1 SET DATE AND TIME ....................................................................................... 7-2
GE Multilin
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.5 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-3 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
7.2 TARGETS
8. THEORY OF OPERATION
8.1 INTRODUCTION
8.1.1 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.4.1 8.5.1 8.6.1 8.6.2 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION .................................................................8-1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM............................................................8-2 CT RATIO MATCHING .......................................................................................8-2 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC....................................................8-3 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS ...........................................8-3 ENHANCED SECURITY ....................................................................................8-4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE................................................................................8-6 SATURATION DETECTOR ................................................................................8-7 OUTPUT LOGIC .................................................................................................8-8 INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLES ..................................................8-8
8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA AND RATIO MATCHING
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE
8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE 8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR 8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
9. APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.1 INTRODUCTION
9.1.1 9.2.1 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.6.1 9.7.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................9-1 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA ..........................................................................9-2 NORTH BUS ZONE............................................................................................9-4 SOUTH BUS ZONE ............................................................................................9-4 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................9-5 HIGH BREAKPOINT...........................................................................................9-5 LOW BREAKPOINT ...........................................................................................9-6 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................9-7 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1 .............................................................................9-7 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-2 .............................................................................9-8 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-3 .............................................................................9-8 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-4 .............................................................................9-9 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-5 .............................................................................9-9 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................9-10 USING SETTING GROUPS .............................................................................9-11
9.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA 9.3 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
9.4 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
9.5 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9.6 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS 9.7 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE
A. FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS
A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

A.1.1 PARAMETER LIST ............................................................................................ A-1
iv
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1 OVERVIEW
B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.2.4 B.2.5 B.2.6 B.3.1 B.3.2 B.4.1 B.4.2 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1 PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-3 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-4 FUNCTION CODE 03H/04H: READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS ..........B-4 FUNCTION CODE 05H: EXECUTE OPERATION ............................................B-5 FUNCTION CODE 06H: STORE SINGLE SETTING ........................................B-5 FUNCTION CODE 10H: STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS..................................B-6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-6 OBTAINING UR FILES USING MODBUS PROTOCOL..................................B-7 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION .............................................................B-8 MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-9 MODBUS MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ................................................B-35
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
C. UCA/MMS
C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW

C.1.1 C.1.2 C.1.3 UCA....................................................................................................................C-1 MMS...................................................................................................................C-1 UCA REPORTING .............................................................................................C-6
D. IEC 60870-5-104
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

D.1.1 D.1.2 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS ...............................................................................D-10
E. DNP
E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE

E.1.1 E.2.1 E.3.1 E.3.2 E.3.3 E.3.4 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4 BINARY INPUT POINTS....................................................................................E-8 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT ....................................E-12 COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-13 ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-14
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE E.3 DNP POINT LISTS
F. MISCELLANEOUS
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 F.1.2 F.2.1 F.2.2 F.3.1 F.4.1 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1 CHANGES TO B90 MANUAL ............................................................................ F-1 LIST OF TABLES............................................................................................... F-2 LIST OF FIGURES............................................................................................. F-3 ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................. F-6 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................... F-8
F.2 TABLES AND FIGURES
F.3 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS F.4 WARRANTY
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
vi
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
WARNING
CAUTION
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/ or downtime. 1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage. Check that the battery tab is intact on the power supply module (for more details, see the BATTERY TAB section near the end of this chapter). View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
B90
Technical Support: Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Bus Differential Relay

GE Power Management
RATINGS:
Control Power: Contact Inputs: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA 300 VDC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual
Model: Mods: Wiring Diagram: Inst. Manual: Serial Number: Firmware: Mfg. Date:
B90D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A NONE 836709 D MAZB98000029 D Oct. 14, 1998
http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm
Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE) Ensure that the following items are included: Instruction Manual GE Multilin Products CD (includes the URPC software and manuals in PDF format) mounting screws registration card (attached as the last page of the manual) Fill out the registration form and mail it back to GE Multilin (include the serial number located on the rear nameplate). For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at www.GEindustrial.com/multilin. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT: GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 TELEPHONE: FAX: E-MAIL: HOME PAGE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only) (905) 201-2098 info.pm@indsys.ge.com http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
GE Multilin
1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems. Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device). It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs. Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly. High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5 milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and Canadian power utilities, in their Utilities Communications Architecture 2 (MMS/UCA2) project. In late 1998, some European utilities began to show an interest in this ongoing initiative. IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.
Input Elements
Contact Inputs Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs CT Inputs VT Inputs Remote Inputs Direct Inputs
Input Status Table
CPU Module
Protective Elements Pickup Dropout Output Operate
Status
Output Elements
Contact Outputs Virtual Outputs Analog Outputs Remote Outputs -DNA -USER Direct Outputs
Logic Gates
Table
LAN Programming Device Operator Interface

827822A2.CDR
Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features. Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay. Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices. b) UR SIGNAL TYPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry contacts are supported. The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the UR device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations. The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines. The UR supports 1 A and 5 A CTs. The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic operands inserted into UCA2 GOOSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and USER defined functions. The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single UR chassis.
GE Multilin
1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1 GETTING STARTED
The UR device operates in a cyclic scan fashion. The UR reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
Solve Logic
PKP DPO OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 13: UR SCAN OPERATION 1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques. Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instantaneous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, I/O Control, HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system. Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection, Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR platform-based applications. 1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS As described above, the architecture of the UR relay is different from previous devices. In order to achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in "Elements". A description of UR elements can be found in the INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS section. An example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the DIGITAL ELEMENTS MENU section. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC section.
1-4
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3URPC SOFTWARE
1.3 URPC SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The Faceplate keypad and display or the URPC software interface can be used to communicate with the relay. The URPC software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format. The following minimum requirements must be met for the URPC software to properly operate on a PC. Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended) Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP 64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended) 40 MB of available hard drive space (100 MB recommended) Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in High Color mode (16-bit color) RS232 and/or Ethernet communications port to the relay 1.3.2 INSTALLATION Refer to the following procedure to install the URPC software: 1. Insert the GE Multilin Products CD into your PC or direct your web browser to the GE Multilin website at www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (preferred method). The Products CD is essentially a snapshot of the GE Multilin website at the date printed on the CD; install from the website to ensure the most recent version of URPC. If the Products CD does not start automatically, choose Run from the Windows Start menu and type D:\SETUP.EXE. Select the Software item from the Resources menu on the right of the GE Multilin welcome page. Select the B90 Bus Differential Relay item from the list of protective relays shown. The B90 Software page will be shown. Select the URPC Software item from the list and save the installation program to your local PC. Run the installation program and follow the on-screen instructions. When the Choose Destination Location window appears and if the software is not to be located in the default directory, click Browse and type in the complete path name including the new directory name. Click Next to continue with the installation procedure. The default program group where the application will be added to is shown in the Select Program Folder window. If it is desired that the application be added to an already existing program group, choose the group name from the list shown. Click Next to begin the installation process.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
10. To launch the URPC application, click Finish in the Setup Complete window. 11. Subsequently, double click on the URPC software icon to activate the application. Refer to the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter in this manual and the URPC Software Help program for more information about the URPC software interface.
NOTE
GE Multilin
1-5
1.3 URPC SOFTWARE
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC WITH THE B90
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the URPC software. Please refer to the URPC Help File and the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter for more information. a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. 1. 2. 3. Start the URPC software. Enter the password "URPC" at the login password box. Select the Help > Connection Wizard menu item to open the Connection Wizard. Click "Next" to continue. Click the "New Interface" button to open the Edit New Interface window. 4. Enter the desired interface name in the Enter Interface Name field. Select the "Ethernet" interface from the drop down list and press "Next" to continue.
Click the "New Device" button to open the Edit New Device Window. Enter the desired name in the Enter Interface Name field. Enter the Modbus address of the relay (from SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL ! MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS) in the Enter Modbus Address field. Enter the IP address (from SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK ! IP ADDRESS) in the Enter TCPIP Address field.
5. 6.
Click the "4.1 Read Device Information" button then "OK" when the relay information has been received. Click "Next" to continue. Click the "New Site" button to open the Edit Site Name window. Enter the desired site name in the Enter Site Name field.
7.
Click the "OK" button then click "Finish". The new Site List tree will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main URPC window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY below to begin communications. b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay. 1. 2. 3. Start the URPC software. Enter the password "URPC" at the login password box. Select the Help > Connection Wizard menu item to open the Connection Wizard. Click "Next" to continue. Click the "New Interface" button to open the Edit New Interface window. 4. Enter the desired interface name in the Enter Interface Name field. Select the "RS232" interface from the drop down list and press "Next" to continue.
Click the "New Device" button to open the Edit New Device Window. Enter the desired name in the Enter Interface Name field. Enter the PC COM port number in the COM Port field.
5. 6.
Click "OK" then click "Next" to continue. Click the "New Site" button to open the Edit Site Name window. Enter the desired site name in the Enter Site Name field.
7.
Click the "OK" button then click "Finish". The new Site List tree will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main URPC window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY below to begin communications.
1-6
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY 1. Select the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
1.3 URPC SOFTWARE
2.
The Display Properties window will open with a flashing status indicator. If the indicator is red, click the Connect button (lightning bolt) in the menu bar of the Displayed Properties window.
3.
In a few moments, the flashing light should turn green, indicating that URPC is communicating with the relay. Refer to the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter in this manual and the URPC Software Help program for more information about the URPC software interface.
NOTE
GE Multilin
1-7
1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4UR HARDWARE
1 GETTING STARTED 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to the HARDWARE chapter for detailed relay mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. 1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS The URPC software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the HARDWARE chapter.
Figure 14: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS To communicate through the B90 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a "straight-through" serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the B90 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, , GND) are connected to the B90 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS section in the HARDWARE chapter for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 , 1 nF) as described in the HARDWARE chapter. 1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
1-8
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5USING THE RELAY
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values. key may be
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below.
!
ACTUAL VALUES
"
!
SETTINGS
"
!
COMMANDS
"
TARGETS
"
## ACTUAL VALUES ## STATUS
## SETTINGS ## PRODUCT SETUP
## COMMANDS ## VIRTUAL INPUTS
No Active Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS (when in use)
"
User Display 1
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
# PASSWORD # SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted
## SETTINGS ## SYSTEM SETUP
GE Multilin
1-9
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the "Not Programmed" state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the TROUBLE indicator will be on and the IN SERVICE indicator off. The relay in the "Not Programmed" state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state. Select the menu message SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION ! RELAY SETTINGS RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed To put the relay in the "Programmed" state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The faceplate TROUBLE indicator will turn off and the IN SERVICE indicator will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to the SETTINGS chapter) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the URPC Help file) via the URPC software interface. 1.5.5 BATTERY TAB The battery tab is installed in the power supply module before the B90 shipped from the factory. The battery tab prolongs battery life in the event the relay is powered down for long periods of time before installation. The battery is responsible for backing up event records, oscillography, data logger, and real-time clock information when the relay is powered off. The battery failure self-test error generated by the relay is a minor and should not affect the relay functionality. When the relay is installed and ready for commissioning, the tab should be removed. The battery tab should be re-inserted if the relay is powered off for an extended period of time. If required, contact the factory for a replacement battery or battery tab. 1.5.6 RELAY PASSWORDS It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING: 1. COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations: change state of virtual inputs clear event records clear oscillography records operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values. Refer to the CHANGING SETTINGS section (in the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter) for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE
1.5.7 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FLEXLOGIC section in the SETTINGS chapter. 1.5.8 COMMISSIONING Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multilin website at www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
1-10
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The B90 Bus Differential Relay is a microprocessor-based architecture that provides protection and metering for busbars with up to 24 feeders. The B90 protection system is a centralized architecture built on 3, 4, or more UR IEDs as per requirements of a particular application. Each IED of the B90 system is a full-featured UR and as such can be accessed and programmed individually. Protection and supervisory functions of the B90 include: Multi-zone differential protection with both restrained (percent, biased) and unrestrained (unbiased, instantaneous) functions incorporated. Differential protection is fast (typical response time: of a power cycle; maximum response time: 1 power cycle) and secure. Security is achieved by using fast and reliable CT saturation detection algorithm and a second, phase comparison operating principle. Check-zone functionality is provided by programming one of the differential zones to enclose the entire bus. Dynamic bus replica functionality and multi-zone protection allowing application of the B90 to multi-section re-configurable busbars. Isolator Monitoring feature monitors up to 48 isolators from a single B90 IED. End Fault Protection (dead-zone protection) is provided for up to 24 breakers. CT Trouble monitoring function is provided for each zone of differential protection. Breaker Fail function is provided for up to 24 breakers. An Instantaneous Overcurrent function is available per each current input of the B90 system. A Time Overcurrent function is available per each current input of the B90 system for backup protection. An Undervoltage function is provided per each voltage input of the B90 system for supervision purposes.
Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor). Diagnostic features include a sequence of records capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events per each B90 IED and oscillography that is user-programmable as to sampling rate (up to 64 samples per cycle), content, writing mode, and record length. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined between the B90 IEDs and throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault. A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2, Modbus/ TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (UR web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time. The B90 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers. The available zones of differential protection and their size (maximum number of inputs) are optional and controlled by the SOFTWARE option portion of the order code. The Breaker Failure function is also optional. Please refer to the ordering section for detailed information on the maximum number of zones and inputs for a given model. In addition, different applications may require differing numbers of B90 IEDs with different hardware configurations. Table 21: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE 27 50 50/74 FUNCTION Undervoltage Instantaneous Overcurrent CT Trouble DEVICE 50/87 51 50BP FUNCTION Unrestrained Bus Differential Time Overcurrent Breaker Fail
GE Multilin
2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Breaker position & trip
51
51
51
51
50BF
50BF
50BF
50BF
ZONE 1
ZONE 2 87B 50/87 50/74
ZONE 3 87B 50/87 50/74
ZONE 4 87B 50/87 50/74
B90 BUS DIFFERENTIAL RELAY

836752A3.CDR
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION Contact Inputs (up to 96 per IED) Contact Outputs (up to 64 per IED) Digital Elements (16 per IED) Direct Inputs/Outputs (96) DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Communications Dynamic Bus Replica End Fault Protection Event Recorder FlexLogic Equations Metering: Current, Voltage, Frequency MMS/UCA Communications MMS/UCA Remote I/O (GOOSE) FUNCTION Modbus Communications Modbus User Map Non-Volatile Latches Oscillography Setting Groups (6) Time Synchronization over SNTP User Definable Displays User Programmable LEDs User Programmable Pushbuttons Virtual Inputs (32 per IED) Virtual Outputs (64 per IED)
2-2
Metering: A, V, Hz
87B
50/87
50/74
Isolator Monitoring & Dynamic Bus Replica
50
27
50
50
27
50
Isolator position
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The main protection functions of the B90 are provided on a per-phase basis. The AC signals of a given phase, both currents and voltages, are connected and processed by a single IED. These IEDs provide for all the protection and monitoring functions that require the AC information. Also these IEDs provide for certain input/output capability (up to a maximum of 48 inputs or 18 outputs per IED). The simplest B90 configuration for non-re-configurable busbars without Breaker Fail protection consists of three UR IEDs. The Breaker Fail and Isolator Monitoring function for dynamic bus replica require a separate IED, and thus a four-IED B90 architecture. These are shown in the figure below. In any B90 configuration, the IEDs are capable of exchanging digital states (FlexLogic operands) in a fast and reliable way over a dedicated B90 fiber connection. The B90 communication capability allows the user to distribute input and output contacts freely in various IEDs. Also, the communications facilitates Breaker Fail and Isolator Monitoring. If more I/O capabilities are required, a fifth B90 IED can be included into the B90 communications ring as shown below. A standard URPC program is used to control the B90 IEDs. Each IED is configured and accessed individually. Functionality is provided to perform certain operations on all the B90 IED simultaneously.
Three-IED Architecture for simple busbars
Four-IED Architecture with Breaker Failure
Five-IED Architecture for extra I/Os
IED 1
IED 1
phase A currents and voltages
I/O Contacts
I/O Contacts
B90 fiber optics redundant communications ring
IED 1
I/O Contacts
IED 2
IED 2
IED 2
phase B currents and voltages
I/O Contacts
I/O Contacts
I/O Contacts
phase C currents and voltages
I/O Contacts phase C currents and voltages I/O Contacts
phase C currents and voltages
I/O Contacts
IED 4
I/O Contacts I/O Contacts
IED 5
IED 4
836756A1.CDR
I/O Contacts
Figure 22: THREE-, FOUR-, AND FIVE-IED B90 ARCHITECTURE
GE Multilin
2-3
B90 fiber optics redundant communications ring
IED 3
IED 3
IED 3
2.1 INTRODUCTION The following figures show sample applications of the B90 protection system:
ZONE 1
B90-A B90-B
23
24
B90-C
836760A2.CDR
Figure 23: SINGLE BUS
ZONE 1
B90-A
ZONE 2
B90-B B90-C
23
24
B90-Logic
21
22
836761A2.CDR
Figure 24: DOUBLE BUS
23
24
ZONE 1
B90-A
ZONE 2
B90-B
ZONE 3
B90-C B90-Logic 21 22 B90-Logic
19
20
836762A2.CDR
Figure 25: TRIPLE BUS
2-4
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
23 22
24 B90-A B90-B B90-C B90-Logic
ZONE 3
B90-Logic 1 2 21
836763A2.CDR
Figure 26: DOUBLE BUS WITH TRANSFER
ZONE 1
B90-A 1 3 21 23 B90-B B90-C 2 4 22 24 B90-Logic
ZONE 2
836764A2.CDR
Figure 27: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF CONFIGURATION BUS
ZONE 1
23
24
ZONE 2
B90-A B90-B
11
12
13
22
B90-C B90-Logic
836765A2.CDR
Figure 28: SINGLE BUS WITH A SINGLE TIE BREAKER
GE Multilin
2-5
2.1 INTRODUCTION
ZONE 1
21
22
ZONE 2
B90-A B90-B
ZONE 3
B90-A
ZONE 4
23
24
B90-B B90-C B90-Logic
B90-C B90-Logic
...
10
11
...
20
836766A2.CDR
Figure 29: DOUBLE BUS WITH ONE TIE BREAKER ON EACH BUS
B90 SYSTEM NO. 1: ZONE 1
25
23
26
24
...
23
27
...
48
B90-A B90-B B90-C B90-Logic B90-Logic
B90-A B90-B B90-C B90-Logic B90-Logic

836767A2.CDR
Figure 210: APPLICATION INVOLVING TWO OR MORE B90 SYSTEMS
2-6
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
A B C CB 1 CB 2
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3
...
CB 7
CB 8
2
8 PHASE B CURRENTS 8 PHASE A CURRENTS 8 PHASE C CURRENTS
836768A1.CDR
Figure 211: APPLICATION TO 8-FEEDER BUSBARS 2.1.2 ORDERING A B90 protection system consists of several UR B90 IEDs as per user needs and system configuration. At least three IEDs are required to provide differential and other protection functions for phases A, B, and C of the busbar. The fourth IED is required for breaker failure functionality and isolator status monitoring as well as extra I/O capability. A fifth IED is sometimes required for additional I/O capability. Before ordering the B90 system, an analysis of the required protection and monitoring functions is required. Please refer to the OVERVIEW section for more information on the B90 architecture. Also, detailed analyses of required AC inputs and input/output contacts must be performed to select appropriate hardware configurations for each of the B90's IEDs. The B90 Bus Differential Relay is provided with an option of protecting either 8, 16, or 24-feeder busbars. When ordered as an 8-feeder protection system, the B90 is configurable for up to 8-input bus differential, regardless of the number of physical current inputs available in the B90 IEDs. The ordering convention for each of the B90 IEDs is described below. The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit and consists of the following UR module functions: power supply, CPU, digital input/output. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations which must be specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following table (full details of available relay modules are contained in the HARDWARE chapter).
GE Multilin
2-7
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Table 23: B90 ORDER CODES

B90 - * - * - * - H C * - F ** - H ** - L ** - N ** - S ** - U ** - W ** B90 | | | | | | | | | | | | | A | | | | | | | | | | | | C | | | | | | | | | | | | D | | | | | | | | | | | | BREAKER 0 | | | | | | | | | | | FAILURE 1 | | | | | | | | | | | SOFTWARE 0 | | | | | | | | | | OPTIONS 1 | | | | | | | | | | 2 | | | | | | | | | | 3 | | | | | | | | | | MOUNT/ H C | | | | | | | | FACEPLATE H P | | | | | | | | POWER H | | | | | | | SUPPLY L | | | | | | | CT/VT DSP 8A | 8A | 8A | | 8C | 8C | 8C | | 8E | 8E | 8E | | DIGITAL I/O | XX XX XX XX XX | 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A | 6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 6B | 6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 6C | 6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 6D | 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 6E | 6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 6F | 6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 6G | 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6H | 6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 6K | 6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 6L | 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 6M | 6N 6N 6N 6N 6N 6N | 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6P | 6R 6R 6R 6R 6R 6R | 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 6S | 6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 6T | 6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6U | TRANSDUCER I/O 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C | (maximum of 4 per unit) 5E 5E 5E 5E 5E | 5F 5F 5F 5F 5F | INTER-RELAY 7H COMMUNICATIONS BASE CPU For Full Sized Horizontal Mount Base Unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP) RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) No breaker failure option With breaker failure option Multi-zone 8-feeder bus protection Multi-zone 16-feeder bus protection Multi-zone 24-feeder bus protection Single-zone 24-feeder bus protection Horizontal (19 rack) Horizontal (19 rack) with User-Programmable Pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Standard 7CT/1VT No Module 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 8 Form-C Outputs 16 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 8 Fast Form-C Outputs 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 8 RTD Inputs 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Inputs 8 dcmA Inputs 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
2-8
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a replacement CPU module or Faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit. Table 24: ORDER CODES FOR UR REPLACEMENT MODULES UR - ** POWER SUPPLY CPU | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1H 1L 9A 9C 9D 3C 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 7U 7V 7Y 7Z 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7Q 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7R 7S 7T 7W 72 73 74 75 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) Horizontal Faceplate with Display & Keypad 2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 8 Form-C Outputs 16 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 8 Fast Form-C Outputs 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 7CT/1VT 110/125 V, 20 mA Input/Output Channel Interface 48/60 V, 20 mA Input/Output Channel Interface 125 V Input, 5V Output, 20 mA Channel Interface 5 V Input, 5V Output, 20 mA Channel Interface 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode LED Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode LED Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, single-mode LASER 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703, Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single -mode, LASER
FACEPLATE DIGITAL I/O
CT/VT DSP
L60 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
UR INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
2-9
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT above 2.0 CT Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of nominal (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater <16 ms at 60 Hz 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater <16 ms at 60 Hz 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of nominal (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 8 ms, whichever is greater 3-pole Phase Current 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.050 to 2.000 pu in steps of 0.001 15 to 100% in steps of 1 50 to 100% in steps of 1 1.00 to 4.00 pu in steps of 0.01 4.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 0.10 to 99.99 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% of Pickup
NOTE
BUS DIFFERENTIAL (87B)

Pickup level: Low slope: High slope: Low breakpoint: High breakpoint: High set level: Dropout level:
Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) >2.0 CT rating 1.5% of reading Operating time: Number of zones: Max number of inputs: one power system cycle (typical) 1 or 4 (option) 8, 16, or 24 (option) Differential current 0.020 to 2.000 pu in steps of 0.001 1.0 to 60.0 sec. in steps of 0.1 3% or 40 ms, whichever is greater one per zone of protection Both normally-open and normally-closed auxiliary contacts Isolator Position, Isolator Alarm, Block Switching 0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.05 3% or 40 ms, whichever is greater 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of nominal (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve) 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Instantaneous or Timed (per IEEE) 3% or 40 ms, whichever is greater
UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: IOC pickup level: IOC dropout level: Level accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 CT: above 2.0 CT: CB open pickup timer: End Fault pickup timer: Time accuracy: Mode: Current supervision: Current supv. pickup: Current supv. dropout:
CT TROUBLE
Responding to: Pickup level: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Availability: Responding to: Asserting: Alarm pickup delay: Time accuracy: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT above 2.0 CT Curve shapes:
END FAULT PROTECTION
ISOLATOR MONITORING
TIME OVERCURRENT
BREAKER FAILURE (OPTIONAL)
Current supv. accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.75% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) above 2 CT rating: 1.5% of reading Time accuracy: 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
TD multiplier: Reset type: Time accuracy:
2-10
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable) Lines of code: Internal variables: Supported operations: 512 64 NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), LATCH (Reset dominant), EDGE DETECTORS, TIMERS any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 32 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
FLEXCURVES
Number: Reset points: Operate points: Time delay: 4 (A through D) 40 (0 through 1 of pickup) 80 (1 through 20 of pickup) 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 48 plus Trip and Alarm from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input Self-reset or Latched 8 2 20 alphanumeric characters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
FLEX STATES
Number: Programmability:
Inputs: Number of timers: Pickup delay: Dropout delay: Type: Number: Output: Execution sequence:
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: Programmability: Reset mode: Number of displays: Lines of display: Parameters
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Set-dominant or Reset-dominant 16 (individually programmed) Stored in non-volatile memory As input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Number of pushbuttons: 12 Mode: Display message: Self-Reset, Latched 2 lines of 20 characters each
2.2.3 MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY

Maximum records: Sampling rate: Triggers: 64 64 samples per power cycle Any element pickup, dropout or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state FlexLogic equation AC input channels Element state Digital input state Digital output state In non-volatile memory
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: Time-tag: Triggers: 1024 events to 1 microsecond Any element pickup, dropout or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state Self-test events In non-volatile memory
Data:
Data storage:
Data storage:
2.2.4 METERING CURRENT

Accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.0% of reading 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: I > 0.25 pu: 0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement) 0.05 Hz 0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)
VOLTAGE
Accuracy:
GE Multilin
2-11
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary: CT rated secondary: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: Conversion range: Current withstand: 1 to 50000 A 1 A or 5 A by connection 20 to 65 Hz < 0.2 VA at rated secondary 0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical 20 ms at 250 times rated 1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated 50.0 to 240.0 V 1.00 to 24000.00 20 to 65 Hz < 0.25 VA at 120 V 1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral 1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Recognition time: Debounce timer: 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 16 V, 30 V, 80 V, 140 V < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 1 to 10 V pk-pk TTL 22 k
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: DC shift: Input impedance:
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: VT ratio: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: Conversion range: Voltage withstand:
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY LOW RANGE

Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: 24 to 48 V at 3 A 20 / 60 V
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: Voltage loss hold-up: Power consumption: 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms 50 ms duration at nominal Typical = 35 VA; Max. = 75 VA
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: Nominal AC voltage: Min/max AC voltage: 125 to 250 V at 0.7 A 88 / 300 V 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A 88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz
INTERNAL FUSE RATINGS

Low range power supply: 7.5 A / 600 V High range power supply: 5 A / 600 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: DC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical 10 000 A
2.2.7 OUTPUTS FORM-A RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 sec.: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: Applicable voltage: Trickle current: Threshold current: 6A 0.25 A DC max. < 4 ms Silver alloy approx. 15 to 250 V DC approx. 1 to 2.5 mA approx. 80 to 100 mA
250 V DC 120 V DC 48 V DC 24 V DC
FAST FORM-C RELAY

Make and carry:
INPUT VOLTAGE
0.1 A max. (resistive load)

IMPEDANCE 2 W RESISTOR 20 K 5 K 2 K 2 K 1 W RESISTOR 50 K 2 K 2 K 2 K
Minimum load impedance:
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 s: 10 A Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: 6A 0.1 A DC max. < 8 ms Silver alloy
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Operate time: Power: Resistance:
< 0.6 ms 2 watts 100 ohms
INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR:
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)

Capacity: Isolation: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC 300 Vpk
2-12
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS
RS232
Front port: 19.2 kbps Up to 115 kbps, isolated together at 36 Vpk 1200 m
ETHERNET PORT
10BaseF: 820 nm, multi-mode, supports halfduplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST connector 820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/fullduplex fiber optic with ST connector 10 db 7.6 dBm 1.65 km
RS485
1 or 2 rear ports: Typical distance: Redundant 10BaseF: Power budget: Max optical Ip power: Typical distance:
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode TRANSMIT POWER 20 dBm RECEIVED SENSITIVITY 30 dBm POWER BUDGET 10 dB
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE 820 nm LED FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR TYPE Multimode ST TYPICAL DISTANCE 1.65 km
NOTE
These Power Budgets are calculated from the manufacturers worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity.
NOTE
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode MAX. OPTICAL INPUT POWER 7.6 dBm
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.
2 dB 3 dB/km One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode Splice losses:
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses. Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
GE Multilin
2-13
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES
Cold: Dry Heat: IEC 60028-2-1, 16 h at 40C IEC 60028-2-2, 16 h at 85C
OTHER
Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6 days Altitude: Up to 2000 m II Installation Category:
2
Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60255-22-4 Oscillatory transient: Insulation resistance: Dielectric strength: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-6 ANSI/IEEE C37.90 EN 61000-4-5 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 60255-22-3 Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS

Conducted RFI: IEC 61000-4-6
Voltage dips/interruptions/variations: IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 60255-11 Power frequency magnetic field immunity: IEC 61000-4-8 Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1 Shock and bump: IEC 60255-21-2
Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2 Surge immunity: RFI susceptibility:

NOTE
Type test report available upon request.
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS THERMAL

Products go through a 12 h burn-in process at 60C
2.2.13 APPROVALS APPROVALS

UL approval pending CSA approval pending Manufactured under an ISO9000 Registered system. CE: LVD 73/23/EEC: EMC 81/336/EEC:
IEC 1010-1 EN 50081-2 EN 50082-2
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
Cleaning: Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
2-14
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment. The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.
Figure 31: B90 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS
GE Multilin
3-1
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
WARNING
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation! Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots. The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown in the figure below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 32: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted. Type 9C and 9D CPU modules are equipped with 10BaseT and 10BaseF Ethernet connectors for communications. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before the it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
3-2
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
836714A3.CDR
Figure 33: REAR TERMINAL VIEW Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 34: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F & H SLOTS
GE Multilin
3-3
3.2 WIRING 3.2WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC
F 1a F 1b F 1c F 2a F 2b F 2c F 3a F 3b F 3c F 4a F 4b F 4c F 5a F 5b F 5c F 6a F 6b F 6c F 7a F 7b F 7c
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
F1
IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC IC1 IG5 IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC IC1 IG5 IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5
3
GE Power Management
IC1 IG5
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1 IB5
B90 BUS DIFFERENTIAL RELAY IED 1
IB IB1 IC5 IC IC1
IED 2
IC IC1
IED 3
IC IC1
F1
V I
F2
V I
F3
V I
F4
V I
F5
V I
F6
DIGITAL I/O
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
F 7a F 7c F 8a F 8c F7b
F 1a F 1b F 1c F 2a F 2b F 2c F 3a F 3b F 3c F 4a F 4b F 4c F 5a F 5b F 5c F 6a F 6b F 6c F 7a F 7c F 8a F 8c F 7b F 8b
GE Power Management
B90 BUS DIFFERENTIAL RELAY IED 4
6H
836751A1.CDR
Figure 35: B90 IS A MULTI-IED PROTECTION SYSTEM
3-4
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
Tx1 Rx1
FIBER CHNL. 1
B90 COM.
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHNL. 2
W7H
IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5
F 1a F 1b
F1
F2
F3
GE Power Management
IC IC1

CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IG5 IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1
F4
IED 1 (PHASE A PROTECTION)
F5
This diagram is based on the following order code: B90-D02-HCL-F8C-H6H-L8C-N6A-S8C-U6H-W7H(sample Phase A protection).
F 1c
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
IED2 RX1
IED4 RX2
IED4 TX1
IED2 TX2
F6
V I
H1
6H
DIGITAL I/O

I
H 8b U 1a U 1b U 1c U 2a U 2b U 2c U 3a U 3b U 3c U 4a U 4b U 4c U 5a U 5b U 5c U 6a U 6b U 6c U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b N1a N1b N1c N2a N2b N2c N3a N3b N3c N4a N4b N4c N 5a N 5c N 6a N 6c N 5b N 7a N7c N 8a N 8c N7b N 8b
Tx1 Rx110BaseF Tx2 Rx210BaseF
6H
Wet
DIGITAL I/O

I
V I
N1
6A
Dry
( DC ONLY )
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
DIGITAL I/O
9D
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b COM D5a D6a D7b B 1b B 1a B 2b B 3a B 3b B5b HI B 6b LO B 6a B 8a B 8b
CPU
CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER
POWER SUPPLY
DC AC or DC
No. 10AWG Minimum
GROUND BUS
MODULES MUST BE GROUNDED IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED
X W V
7 COM 6
U T
8
S R
CT
P N M L
6 I/O 8 CT
J
6
H G
8
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
I/O
I/O
CT
Figure 36: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (PHASE A)
GE Multilin
CAUTION
I V I V I V I V I V V V V V V V V
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5b H 5c H 6a H 6b H 6c H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b
IC5 IC
F7
H2
IC1 IG5
F8
H3
IG IG1
H4
IA5 IA
H5
L 1a L 1b L 1c L 2a L 2b L 2c L 3a L 3b L 3c L 4a L 4b L 4c L 5a L 5b L 5c L 6a L 6b L 6c L 7a L 7b L 7c L 8a L 8b L 8c
F9
H6 H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H7b
IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC
F10
F11
U1
IC1 IG5
F12
U2
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1
U3
waitng
F13
U4
U5
IB5 IB
F14
U6 U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U7b
IB1 IC5 IC IC1 IG5 IG IG1
F15
F16
N2
IA5
S 1a S 1b S 1c S 2a S 2b S 2c S 3a S 3b S 3c S 4a S 4b S 4c S 5a S 5b S 5c S 6a S 6b S 6c S 7a S 7b S 7c S 8a S 8b S 8c
F17
N3
IA IA1
N4 N 5a N 5c N 6a N 6c N 5b N 7a N 7c N 8a N 8c N7b
IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC IC1 IG5
F18
F19
F20
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1
NORMAL ALTERNATE COM 1 TEST ONLY RS485 COM 2

IRIG-B
F21
IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC IC1 IG5 IG IG1
F22
SURGE GROUND
F23
F24
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
836747
.CDR
3-5
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
F1
IA5 IA
Tx1 Rx1
FIBER CHNL. 1
B90 COM.
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHNL. 2
W7H
F 1a F 1b F 1c F 2a F 2b F 2c F 3a F 3b F 3c F 4a F 4b F 4c F 5a F 5b F 5c F 6a F 6b F 6c F 7a F 7b F 7c F 8a F 8b F 8c
IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5
F2
F3
GE Power Management
IC IC1

CURRENT INPUTS 8C
F4
F5
IED 2 (PHASE B PROTECTION)
3
V I
F6
F7
H1
6H
DIGITAL I/O

I
6H
Wet
DIGITAL I/O

I
V I
N1
6A
Dry
( DC ONLY )
DIGITAL I/O
9D
CPU
POWER SUPPLY
DC AC or DC
No. 10AWG Minimum
GROUND BUS
X W V
7 COM 6
U T
8
S R
CT
P N M L
6 I/O 8 CT
J
6
H G
8
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
I/O
I/O
CT
Figure 37: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (PHASE B)
3-6
CAUTION
IC5 IC
H2
IC1 IG5
F8
H3
IG IG1
H4
F9
H5
IA5 IA
F10
F11
U1
IC1 IG5
F12
U2
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1
U3
waitng
F13
U4
F14
U5
IB5 IB
F15
F16
N2
IA5
F17
IA IA1
N3
F18
F19
F20
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1

IRIG-B
F21
F22
SURGE GROUND
F23
F24
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
836748
.CDR
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code. GE Multilin
IED3 RX1
IED1 RX2
IED1 TX1
IED3 TX2
This diagram is based on the following order code: B90-D02-HCL-F8C-H6H-L8C-N6A-S8C-U6H-W7H (sample Phase B protection).
CURRENT INPUTS 8C CURRENT INPUTS 8C
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
IED4 RX1
IED2 RX2
IED2 TX1
IED4 TX2
C
F1
IA5 IA
Tx1 Rx1
FIBER CHNL. 1
B90 COM.
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHNL. 2
W7H
F 1a F 1b F 1c F 2a F 2b F 2c F 3a F 3b F 3c F 4a F 4b F 4c F 5a F 5b F 5c F 6a F 6b F 6c F 7a F 7b F 7c F 8a F 8b F 8c
IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5
F2
F3
GE Power Management
IC IC1
F4

CURRENT INPUTS 8C
F5
IED 3 (PHASE C PROTECTION)
F6
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
This diagram is based on the following order code: B90-D02-HCL-F8C-H6H-L8C-N6A-S8C-U6H-W7H (sample Phase C protection).
F7
V I
H1
6H
DIGITAL I/O

I
6H
Wet
DIGITAL I/O

I
V I
N1
6A
Dry
( DC ONLY )
DIGITAL I/O
9D
CPU
POWER SUPPLY
DC AC or DC
No. 10AWG Minimum
GROUND BUS
X W V
7 COM 6
U T
8
S R
CT
P N M L
6 I/O 8 CT
J
6
H G
8
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
I/O
I/O
CT
Figure 38: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (PHASE C)
GE Multilin
CAUTION
I V I V I V I V I V V V V V V V V
IC5 IC
H2
IC1 IG5
F8
H3
IG IG1
H4
IA5 IA
F9
H5
F10
F11
F12
U1
IC1 IG5
U2
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1
F13
U3
waitng
U4
F14
U5
IB5 IB
F15
F16
F17
N2
IA5
N3
IA IA1
F18
F19
F20
CURRENT INPUTS 8C
IG IG1 IA5 IA IA1
F21

IRIG-B
F22
F23
SURGE GROUND
F24
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
836749
.CDR
3-7
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
6H
6H
DIGITAL I/O
F1
V I
H 8b
I
SURGE
IED 4 (LOGIC)
F2
V I
V I
U2
F4
V I
V I
U3
F5
V I
V I
U4
F6
Wet
DIGITAL I/O
V I
U5
F 7a F 7c F 8a F 8c F7b
DIGITAL I/O
6H
L1
V I
waitng U 8b
N1a N1b N1c N2a N2b N2c N3a N3b N3c N4a N4b N4c N 5a N 5c N 6a N 6c N 5b N 7a N7c N 8a N 8c N7b N 8b
SURGE
I
L2
V I
V I
N1
6A
L3
V I
N2 L4 N3 L5 N4 L6
V V
Dry
( DC ONLY )
DIGITAL I/O
6H
S1
V I
SURGE
9D
S2
V I
S3
V I
S4
CPU
V I
IRIG-B
SURGE GROUND CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER
S5
V I
S6
POWER SUPPLY
DC AC or DC
DIGITAL I/O
S 7a S 7c S 8a S 8c S7b
No. 10AWG Minimum
GROUND BUS
836750
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
7 COM
6 I/O
8 I/O
6 I/O
8 I/O
6 I/O
8 I/O
9 CPU
1 Power Supply
Figure 39: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (BREAKER FAIL & ISOLATOR MONITORING)
3-8
GE Multilin
CAUTION
X W V
U T
S R
P N M L
H G
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON
N 7a N 7c N 8a N 8c N7b
DIGITAL I/O
N 5a N 5c N 6a N 6c N 5b
L 7a L 7c L 8a L 8c L7b
U 1a U 1b U 1c U 2a U 2b U 2c U 3a U 3b U 3c U 4a U 4b U 4c U 5a U 5b U 5c U 6a U 6b U 6c U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b
6H
U1
F3
I V I V I V I V I V I V
H1
Tx1 Rx1
FIBER CHNL. 1
B90 COM.
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHNL. 2
W7H
H2
H3
H4
H5
GE Power Management

F 1a F 1b F 1c F 2a F 2b F 2c F 3a F 3b F 3c F 4a F 4b F 4c F 5a F 5b F 5c F 6a F 6b F 6c F 7a F 7c F 8a F 8c F 7b F 8b L 1a L 1b L 1c L 2a L 2b L 2c L 3a L 3b L 3c L 4a L 4b L 4c L 5a L 5b L 5c L 6a L 6b L 6c L 7a L 7c L 8a L 8c L 7b L 8b S 1a S 1b S 1c S 2a S 2b S 2c S 3a S 3b S 3c S 4a S 4b S 4c S 5a S 5b S 5c S 6a S 6b S 6c S 7a S 7c S 8a S 8c S 7b S 8b
.CDR
This diagram is based on the following order code: B90-D02-HCL-F6H-H6H-L6H-N6A-SHH-U6H-W7H (sample Breaker Fail Protection) The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
IED1 RX1
IED3 RX2
IED3 TX1
IED1 TX2
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of UR module hardware is shown in the following table: Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE TYPE 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9
1
MODULE FUNCTION FROM Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Reserved for Future Reserved for Future Reserved for Future Analog I/O Digital I/O CT/VT CPU
TERMINALS TO Chassis Chassis Chassis N/A N/A N/A Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis High (+); Low (+); () 48 V DC (+) and () Relay Terminals N/A N/A N/A All except 8b All (See Precaution 2) All All except 7b
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH (AC) 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1 N/A N/A N/A < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute < 50 VDC
See TEST PRECAUTION 1 below.
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute. For testing of dielectric strength where the test interval may exceed one minute, always observe the following precautions: 1. 2. The connection from ground to the Filter Ground (Terminal 8b) and Surge Ground (Terminal 8a) must be removed before testing. Some versions of the digital I/O module have a Surge Ground connection on Terminal 8b. On these module types, this connection must be removed before testing.
GE Multilin
3-9
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CAUTION
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR! The B90 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
NOTE
The power supply module can be ordered with either of two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for details): LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections. The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see MAJOR SELF-TEST ERRORS table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
Figure 310: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3-10
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
a) AC CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.
CAUTION
Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used. b) AC VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS Each B90 VT input is intended for monitoring a single-phase voltage. The may include phase voltages or neutral voltage from the open-delta VT. Substitute the tilde "~" symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figures.
~ 4b ~ 3b ~ 2b ~ 1b ~ 7a ~ 8a ~ 6a ~ 4a ~ 5a ~ 3a ~ 2a ~ 1a
~ 2c
~ 8c
~ 6c
~ 3c
~ 7c
~ 1c
VA
VB
VC
VX
VC
VB
VX
IG5
IA5
VOLTAGE INPUTS 8A / 8B
CURRENT INPUTS
827831A8-X5.CDR
~ 6b
~ 7b
~ 3b
~ 2b
~ 1b
~ 5b
IG1
VA
IA1
IA
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IG
IB
IC
~ 4c ~ 8b ~ 8a
V IG
~ 5c
~ 4b
~ 7a
~ 6a
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 1a
~ 5a
~ 8a
~ 4a
~ 6c
~ 2c
~ 1c
~ 5c
~ 4c
~ 3c
IG5
IG1
~ 7c
IG5
IA5
IA5
CURRENT INPUTS 8C / 8D
827831A8-X3.CDR
Figure 311: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
~ 6b
~ 7b
~ 3b
~ 2b
~ 1b
~ 5b
~ 4b
~ 7a
~ 6a
~ 3a
~ 2a
~ 1a
~ 5a
~ 4a
~ 6c
~ 2c
~ 1c
~ 5c
~ 4c
~ 3c
IG5
IG1
IA1
IG
IA5
IA5
IA1
IA
IA
IB
IC5
IC1
IB
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IB5
IB1
IC
IC
~ 7c
CURRENT INPUTS 8E
VOLT INP. 827831A8-X4.CDR
Figure 312: ADDITIONAL CT MODULE WIRING
GE Multilin
~ 8c
IG1
IA1
IG
IA1
IA
IA
IB
IC5
IC1
IB
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IB5
IB1
IC
IC
~ 8c
3-11
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a digital I/O module is ordered with contact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be totally isolated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the available number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically isolated, each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four outputs to be supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position. UR RELAY FORM-A OUTPUT CONTACTS Some Form-A outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On = 1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below above for the Form-A outputs with: a) optional voltage monitor b) optional current monitor c) with no monitoring
~#a I ~#b V ~#c If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff + Load V ~#c I ~#b ~#a If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff Load +
a) Voltage with optional current monitoring
Voltage monitoring only
Both voltage and current monitoring
~#a V ~#b I ~#c If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff + I Load V
~#a
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff
~#b
Load
b) Current with optional voltage monitoring
~#c
Current monitoring only
Both voltage and current monitoring (external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b
+ Load
c) No monitoring
~#c
827821A4.CDR
Figure 313: FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS
3-12
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (Cont Op # Von, Cont Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is Breaker Trip Circuit Integrity monitoring; a typical application of the Current monitor is seal-in of the control command. Refer to the DIGITAL ELEMENTS section in Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A contacts can be applied for Breaker Trip Circuit Integrity Monitoring. Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized!! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels! USE OF FORM-A OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE
WARNING
For Form-A output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the FormA contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance. The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A contact outputs, the FlexLogic Operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).
Table 32: DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6B I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6C I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C ~6D I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6E I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6F I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C
~6G I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6H I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
GE Multilin
3-13
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
~6K I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C
~6L I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6M I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6N I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
3
~6P I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6R I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6S I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6T I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6U I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
3-14
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
Figure 314: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (SHEET 1 OF 2)
GE Multilin
3-15
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
Figure 315: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (SHEET 2 OF 2) CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
CAUTION
3-16
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit. A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as 16 V DC for 24 V sources, 30 V DC for 48 V sources, 80 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 140 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 7b COMMON ~ 8b SURGE 6B ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 8b SURGE
24-250V
B 1b CRITICAL B 1a FAILURE B 2b B 3a 48 VDC OUTPUT B 3b + B 5b HI+ CONTROL B 6b LO+ POWER B 6a B 8a SURGE B 8b FILTER
POWER SUPPLY
827741A4.CDR
Figure 316: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
GE Multilin
3-17
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.6 RS232 FACEPLATE PROGRAM PORT
A 9 pin RS232C serial port is located on the relays faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the URPC software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors. Note that the baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
Figure 317: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION 3.2.7 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s) depending on the CPU module installed. Table 33: CPU COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS
CPU TYPE 9A 9C 9D COM 1 RS485 10BASE-F Redundant 10BASE-F COM 2 RS485 RS485 RS485
SURGE GROUND
827831A8-X6.CDR
Figure 318: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
3-18
CPU
D2a D3a D4a D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
9C
COM
RS485 COM 1 RS485 COM 2
9A
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
TEST ONLY RS485 COM 2
COM 1
Tx2 Rx210BaseF
ALTERNATE COM 1 TEST ONLY RS485 COM 2

IRIG-B
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
COM
COM
CPU
SURGE
SURGE
CPU
IRIG-B
IRIG-B
COM
9D
Tx
Rx 10BaseF
NORMAL
Tx1 Rx110BaseF
NORMAL
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE a) RS485 PORTS
3.2 WIRING
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system or PLC is possible. To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485 terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely. Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed. Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
ZT (*) DATA
SHIELD
TWISTED PAIR
RELAY
D2a D3a RS485 +
DATA
RS485 PORT RS485 36V D7b

Required
COM SURGE
CHASSIS GROUND
D4a
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER
COMP 485COM
GROUND SHIELD AT SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY OR AT UR RELAY ONLY
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END (TYPICALLY 120 Ohms and 1 nF)
RELAY
D2a D3a D7b D4a RS485 + 485 SURGE COMP 485COM
UP TO 32 DEVICES, MAXIMUM 4000 FEET
RELAY
ZT (*)
D2a D3a D7b D4a
485 + 485 SURGE COMP 485COM

LAST DEVICE
827757A5.DWG
Figure 319: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
3-19
3.2 WIRING b) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT
3 HARDWARE
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for CPU types 9C and 9D. The 9D CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB). When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required. 3.2.8 IRIG-B
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL
IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR

(DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
RELAY
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE + D5a IRIG-B(+) RECEIVER D6a IRIG-B(-)
827756A4.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
Figure 320: IRIG-B CONNECTION IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
3-20
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The B90 Direct I/O feature makes use of the Type 7 series of commuinications modules. These modules are also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The Direct I/O feature uses the communications channel(s) provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all UR relays models except for the L60 and L90 Line relays. The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four UR relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. The maximum number of UR relays that can be connnected in a single ring is eight.
Tx
UR #1
Rx Tx
UR #2
Rx Tx
UR #3
Rx Tx
UR #4
Rx
842006A1.CDR
Figure 321: DIRECT I/O SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION The following diagram shows the interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules. Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required connections are as follows: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, UR2-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, and UR4-Tx2 to UR1Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1 Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #1
UR #2
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #3
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #4
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2

842007A1.CDR
Figure 322: DIRECT I/O DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
3-21
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors. Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
MODULE TYPE 7A 7B 7C 7D 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7R 7S 7T 7W 72 73 74 SPECIFICATION 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Ch 1 - RS422, Ch 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Ch 1 - RS422, Ch 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Ch 1 - RS422, Ch 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Ch 1 - RS422, Ch 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
3-22
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: Connection Location: 7A / 7B / 7C Slot X 7H / 7I / 7J Slot X
RX1 TX1
RX1 TX1
3
RX2 TX2 1 Channel 2 Channels
831719A2.CDR
Figure 323: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: Connection Location: 72/ 7D Slot X TX1 RX1 73/ 7K Slot X TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 324: LASER FIBER MODULES When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
GE Multilin
3-23
3 HARDWARE 3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b
Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 1
SURGE
Shld. Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 2
SURGE
Figure 325: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
7R 7R
G.703 CHANNEL 1
Shld.
G.703 CHANNEL 1
Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
L90 COMM.
G.703 CHANNEL 2
Rx Tx + Rx +
Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 2
SURGE
SURGE
831727A1.CDR
Figure 326: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and B is equivalent to .
NOTE
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
3-24
L90 COMM.
Tx -
L90 COMM.
Tx -
7R
Shld.
Shld. Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
SURGE
Shld. Tx -
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 4. 5. 6.
Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes. Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the G.703 module: Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 327: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING Table 35: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES S1 S5 and S6 FUNCTION OFF Octet Timing Disabled ON Octet Timing 8 kHz S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF Loop Timing Mode S5 = ON and S6 = OFF Internal Timing Mode S5 = OFF and S6 = ON Minimum Remote Loopback Mode S5 = ON and S6 = ON Dual Loopback Mode
c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1) If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When L90's are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF).
GE Multilin
3-25
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6) INTERNAL TIMING MODE:
3 HARDWARE
System clock generated internally; therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the Internal Timing Mode for back to back connections.
Figure 328: BACK TO BACK CONNECTION For Back to Back Connections: Octet Timing (S1 = OFF); Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF)
LOOP TIMING MODE: System clock derived from the received line signal; therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems.
Figure 329: CONNECTION TO HIGHER ORDER SYSTEM For connection to a higher order system (factory defaults): Octet Timing (S1 = ON); Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF) e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6) MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE: In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DUAL LOOPBACK MODE: In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each Receiver/ Transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be
3-26
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE The following figure shows the RS422 2-Terminal interface configuration at 64K baud. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically isolated. SHIELD TERMINATION The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows: Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b. Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b. The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 5b W 5a W 4a W 6b W 7b W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com
RS422 CHANNEL 1
RS422 CHANNEL 2
CLOCK
SURGE
RS422.CDR p/o 827831A6.CDR
Figure 330: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
7T 7T
Tx -
RS422 CHANNEL 1
L90 COMM.
Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com
CLOCK
SURGE
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
L90 COMM.
W7W
Tx -
+ 64 KHz
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com
RS422 CHANNEL 1
L90 COMM.
CLOCK
SURGE
831728A3.CDR
Figure 331: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
GE Multilin
3-27
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS a) RS422: TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS
3 HARDWARE
The RS422 Interface may be used for 1 channel or 2 channel applications over SONET/SDH and/or Multiplexed systems. When used in 1 channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing Tx, Rx, and Send Timing connections. However, when used in 2 channel applications, certain criteria have to be followed due to the fact that there is 1 clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your Data Module has a feature called Terminal Timing. Terminal Timing is a common feature to most Synchronous Data Units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the Terminal Timing feature, 2 channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The Send Timing outputs from the Multiplexer - Data Module 1, will connect to the Clock inputs of the UR - RS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the Send Timing outputs of Data Module 1 will also be paralleled to the Terminal Timing inputs of Data Module 2. By using this configuration the timing for both Data Modules and both UR - RS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR - RS422 channels will be synchronized via the Send Timing leads on Data Module 1 as shown in the following figure. If the Terminal Timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Data Module 1 Pin No. Signal Name SD(A) - Send Data SD(B) - Send Data RD(A) - Received Data RD(B) - Received Data RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS) RT(A) - Receive Timing RT(B) - Receive Timing CS(A) - Clear To Send CS(B) - Clear To Send Local Loopback Remote Loopback Signal Ground ST(A) - Send Timing ST(B) - Send Timing Data Module 2 Pin No. Signal Name TT(A) - Terminal Timing TT(B) - Terminal Timing SD(A) - Sand Data SD(B) - Sand Data RD(A) - Received Data RD(B) - Received Data RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS) CS(A) - Clear To Send CS(B) - Clear To Send Local Loopback Remote Loopback Signal Ground ST(A) - Send Timing ST(B) - Send Timing 831022A2.CDR
7W
Tx1(+) Tx1(-)
RS422 CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+) Rx1(-) Shld.
CLOCK
+ Tx2(+) Tx2(-)
L90 COMM.
RS422 CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+) Rx2(-) Shld. com
SURGE
W 2a W 3b W 4b W 3a W 6a W 7a W 8b W 4a W 5b W 6b W 5a W 7b W 2b W 8a
Figure 332: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION Data Module 1 provides timing to the B90 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data Module 1 also provides timing to Data Module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The Data Module Pin Numbers, in the figure above, have been omitted since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
NOTE
3-28
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE b) RS422: TRANSIT TIMING
The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.
Tx Clock
3
Tx Data
831733A1.CDR
Figure 333: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS c) RS422: RECEIVE TIMING The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data. NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code. To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock.
GE Multilin
3-29
3 HARDWARE 3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
Rx1 Tx1 + Rx1 + Shld.
RS422 CHANNEL 1
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHANNEL 2
W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
+ com
CLOCK (CHANNEL1) SURGE
L907LMNP.CDR P/O 827831A6.CDR
Figure 334: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units.
NOTE
L90 COMM.
W7L, M, N, P and 74
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a
Tx1 -
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b
Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 1
SURGE
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHANNEL 2
G703.CDR P/O 827831A7.CDR
Figure 335: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
3-30
L90 COMM.
W7E, F, G and Q
Shld.
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1 URPC SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
The URPC software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (see FACEPLATE INTERFACE section in this chapter). URPC provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. off-line) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time. The URPC software, provided with every B90 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, or NT. This chapter provides a summary of the basic URPC software interface features. The URPC Help file provides details for getting started and using the URPC software interface. 4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST To start using the URPC program, a Site List must first be created. See the instructions in the URPC Help program under the topic Creating a Site List. 4.1.3 URPC SOFTWARE OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A COMMUNICATING DEVICE The URPC software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR product series. b) USING SETTINGS FILES The URPC software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings: In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays. While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay. You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings: Device Definition Product Setup System Setup FlexLogic Grouped Elements Control Elements Inputs/Outputs Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes. c) CREATING / EDITING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram. d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
GE Multilin
4-1
4.1 URPC SOFTWARE INTERFACE e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via: Event Recorder facility The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. Oscillography facility The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events. f) CREATING INTERACTIVE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS The URPC software provides an icon-based interface facility for designing and monitoring electrical schematic diagrams of sites employing UR relays. g) FILE SUPPORT Execution Any URPC file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (*.urs) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu. Drag and Drop The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-ordercode-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target. New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device. h) UR FIRMWARE UPGRADES The firmware of a UR device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the URPC software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the URPC Help program under the topic Upgrading Firmware. Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
NOTE
4-2
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 URPC SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.4 URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
The URPC software main window supports the following primary display components: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view Main window menu bar Main window tool bar Site List control bar window Settings List control bar window Device data view window(s), with common tool bar Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar Workspace area with data view tabs Status bar
Figure 41: URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
GE Multilin
4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface is implemented via the URPC software. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the arrangement of faceplate panels.
LED PANEL 1
LED PANEL 2
LED PANEL 3
DISPLAY
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND
IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP
RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
ENTER
VALUE
+/-
KEYPAD
Figure 42: UR HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS 4.2.2 LED INDICATORS a) LED PANEL 1 This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS !" INPUT/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu). The USER keys are not used in this relay. The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT
IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP
RESET USER 1
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
USER 2 USER 3
Figure 43: LED PANEL 1 STATUS INDICATORS: IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed. TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode. TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
4-4
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag waiting to be reset. VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: Indicates current was involved. ZONE 1: Indicates Bus Zone 1 was involved. ZONE 2: Indicates Bus Zone 2 was involved. ZONE 3: Indicates Bus Zone 3 was involved. ZONE 4: Indicates Bus Zone 4 was involved.
b) LED PANELS 2 & 3 These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 44: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE) c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2
SETTINGS IN USE
GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 GROUP 8
Figure 45: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABEL) The default labels represent the following: GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group. Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
NOTE
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To mach the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered by the user as shown in the USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section of the SETTINGS chapter. The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both LED panels 2 and 3 as explained in the next section.
GE Multilin
4-5
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated by downloading a zip file from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/ This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The CorelDRAW panel-templates provide relative LED locations and located example-text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling. 1. Remove the clear LEXAN FRONT COVER (P/N: 1501-0014).
Push in and gently lift up the cover.
2.
Pop out the LED MODULE and/or BLANK MODULE with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic.
( LED MODULE )
( BLANK MODULE )
3. 4.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side. Put the clear LEXAN FRONT COVER back into place. 4.2.4 CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE
The following items are required to customize the UR display module: 1. Black and white or color printer (color preferred) CorelDRAW version 5.0 or later software 1 each of: 8.5 x 11 white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (P/N: 1516-0069), custom module cover (P/N: 1502-0015) Open the LED panel customization template in CorelDRAW. Add text in places of the Xs on the template(s) with the Edit > Text menu command. Delete the X place holders as required.Setup the print copy by selecting the File > Print menu command and pressing the "Properties" button. On the Page Setup tab, choose Paper Size: "Letter" and Orientation: "Landscape" and press "OK". Click the "Options" button and select the Layout tab. For Position and Size enable the "Center image" and "Maintain aspect ratio" check boxes and press "OK", then "OK" once more to print. From the printout, cut-out the BACKGROUND TEMPLATE from the three windows (use the cropmarks as a guide).
2. 3. 4. 5.
4-6
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 6.
Put the BACKGROUND TEMPLATE on top of the custom display module (P/N: 1513-0069) and snap the clear cutome module cover (P/N: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
CUT
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
CUT OUT
x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x x x
CUT OUT
x
x x x x x x
CUT
Figure 46: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION TEMPLATES (EXAMPLE) 4.2.5 DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display. 4.2.6 KEYPAD Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values. key may be
CUT
CUT
BACKGROUND TEMPLATE
BACKGROUND TEMPLATE
BACKGROUND TEMPLATE
MENU
7
MESSAGE
8 5 2
9 6 3 +/-
HELP
4 1
ESCAPE
ENTER
VALUE
Figure 47: KEYPAD
GE Multilin
4-7
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.7 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below.
!
ACTUAL VALUES
"
!
SETTINGS
"
!
COMMANDS
"
TARGETS
"
No Active Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS (when in use)
"
User Display 1
4.2.8 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted
## SETTINGS ## SYSTEM SETUP
4-8
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.9 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s " MINIMUM: MAXIMUM: 0.5 10.0 Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the again to view the next context sensitive help message. key For example, select the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH setting.
MESSAGE TIME
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available. 0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display. VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value. As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence "2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered. Until the key is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press the key to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 2.5 s " NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members. ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command", "Setting", and "Factory Service". keys. The VALUE key displays the next selection while
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE the VALUE key displays the previous selection. ACCESS LEVEL: Setting " NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press the key at any time for the context sensitive help messages. Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process.
GE Multilin
4-9
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters. In order to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications, there are several places where text messages may be programmed. One example is the MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD. To enter alphanumeric text messages, the following procedure should be followed: Example: to enter the text, Breaker #1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press to enter text edit mode. or VALUE key until the character 'B' appears; press to advance the cursor to the next
Press the VALUE position.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1. Press to store the text.
If you have any problem, press the key to view the context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, the key displays how to edit and store a new value.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed When the relay is powered up, the TROUBLE indicator will be on, the IN SERVICE indicator off, and this message displayed. This indicates that the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display. key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display. key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS " ## SETTINGS ## PRODUCT SETUP # PASSWORD # SECURITY # DISPLAY # PROPERTIES # COMMUNICATIONS #
# USER-DEFINABLE # DISPLAYS # INSTALLATION # RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed
4-10
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 5. 6.
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE key or the VALUE
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE key to change the selection to "Programmed". Press the key. RELAY SETTINGS: Programmed
RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed 7.
NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the IN SERVICE indicator will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS To enter the initial SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE display. SETTINGS " ## SETTINGS ## PRODUCT SETUP # PASSWORD # SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ---------4. 5. 6. 7. After the 'CHANGE...PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE change the selection to Yes. Press the key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'. key. . key or the VALUE key to key until the ACCESS LEVEL: message appears on the display. key until the CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD: message appears on the
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the
When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' is displayed, re-type in the same password and press CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
GE Multilin
4-11
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 8.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD will be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered. In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.
4-12
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW ## SETTINGS ## PRODUCT SETUP # B90 FUNCTION # # PASSWORD # SECURITY # DISPLAY # PROPERTIES # COMMUNICATIONS # # MODBUS USER MAP # # REAL TIME # CLOCK # OSCILLOGRAPHY # # USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LEDS # USER-PROGRAMMABLE # PUSHBUTTONS # FLEX STATE # PARAMETERS # USER-DEFINABLE # DISPLAYS # DIRECT I/O # # INSTALLATION # ## SETTINGS ## SYSTEM SETUP # AC INPUTS # # POWER SYSTEM # # FLEXCURVES # # BUS # ## SETTINGS ## FLEXLOGIC # FLEXLOGIC # EQUATION EDITOR # FLEXLOGIC # TIMERS # NON-VOLATILE # LATCHES
5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
See page 5-4. See page 5-5. See page 5-6. See page 5-7. See page 5-14. See page 5-14. See page 5-15. See page 5-17. See page 5-18. See page 5-20. See page 5-20. See page 5-22. See page 5-26.
See page 5-27. See page 5-27. See page 5-28. See page 5-35.
See page 5-47. See page 5-47. See page 5-48.
GE Multilin
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW ## SETTINGS ## GROUPED ELEMENTS # SETTING GROUP 1 # # SETTING GROUP 2 #
5 SETTINGS
See page 5-49.
# SETTING GROUP 6 # ## SETTINGS ## CONTROL ELEMENTS # SETTING GROUPS # # DIGITAL ELEMENTS # # MONITORING # ELEMENTS ## SETTINGS ## INPUTS / OUTPUTS # CONTACT INPUTS # # VIRTUAL INPUTS #
See page 5-82. See page 5-84. See page 5-85. See page 5-85. See page 5-86. See page 5-87. See page 5-88. See page 5-89. See page 5-89. See page 5-90. See page 5-90.
# CONTACT OUTPUTS # # VIRTUAL OUTPUTS # # REMOTE DEVICES # # REMOTE INPUTS # # REMOTE OUTPUTS # DNA BIT PAIRS # REMOTE OUTPUTS # UserSt BIT PAIRS # RESETTING # # DIRECT INPUTS # # DIRECT OUTPUTS # ## SETTINGS ## TESTING TEST MODE FUNCTION: # FORCE CONTACT # INPUTS # FORCE CONTACT # OUTPUTS
5-2
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Element which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input. Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent of the selected active setting group. The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F). Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities: pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity) For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. For voltage elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary voltage of the VT.
Some settings are common to most elements and are discussed below: FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as "Enabled". The factory default is "Disabled". Once programmed to "Enabled", any element associated with the Function becomes active and all options become available. NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element. PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup. PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup and Operate output states. RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range. BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control. TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to SelfReset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay. EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to Enabled, events are created for: (Element) PKP (pickup) (Element) DPO (dropout) (Element) OP (operate) The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
GE Multilin
5-3
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION
5 SETTINGS 5.2.1 B90 FUNCTION
# B90 FUNCTION #
B90 FUNCTION: Protection
Range: Protection, Logic
The setting acts as a B90 "master switch" enabling certain relay elements. For example, all features dependent on AC inputs (such as bus differential, instantaneous overcurrent, time overcurrent, and undervoltage) become available if the B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". Features that are not dependent on AC signals (such as logic part of the Breaker Failure protection or Isolator Monitoring) become available if the B90 FUNCTION is set to "Logic". Typically, three IEDs in the B90 system have hardware configured to support AC inputs (set B90 FUNCTION to "Protection"), while the fourth IED is configured to support all required input contacts and is intended for isolator monitoring and other logic functions (set B90 FUNCTION to "Logic"). The B90 FUNCTION setting allows the user to work with a single setting file, program all required functions (both protection and logic), download the same file to all the B90 IEDs, and modify the settings accordingly to finalize the application. Communications and B90 FUNCTION settings are typically modified when downloading the common B90 setting file.
5-4
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.2 PASSWORD SECURITY
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP ! PASSWORD SECURITY
MESSAGE
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting, Factory Service (for factory use only) Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision are: COMMAND: changing the state of virtual inputs clearing the event records clearing the oscillography records changing the date and time clearing the data logger changing any setting test mode operation
SETTING:
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled. Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked: 1. 2. 3. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________ VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________ NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically revert to the "Restricted" level. If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD. If the SETTING and COMMAND passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.3 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
# DISPLAY # PROPERTIES
MESSAGE
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: 300 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25 % SCREEN SAVER FEATURE: Disabled SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: 30 min CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.020 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Visible only if a VFD is installed Range: Disabled, Enabled Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1 Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness. SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the B90 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is "Enabled", the LCD backlighting is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on. CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The B90 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off. VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The B90 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off. Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of "0.02 pu" for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and "1.0 V" for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
NOTE
5-6
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
a) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS ! SERIAL PORTS
# COMMUNICATIONS # # SERIAL PORTS #

MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM1 PARITY: None RS485 COM1 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM2 PARITY: None RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU 9A is ordered. Range: None, Odd, Even Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
The B90 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and has fixed parameters of 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type will depend on the CPU ordered: it may be either an Ethernet or an RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a personal computer running URPC. This software is used for downloading or uploading setting files, viewing measured parameters, and upgrading the relay firmware to the latest version. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-7
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP b) NETWORK

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK
5 SETTINGS
# COMMUNICATIONS # # NETWORK #
MESSAGE
IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 SUBNET IP MASK: 0.0.0.0 GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 # OSI NETWORK # ADDRESS (NSAP) ETHERNET OPERATION MODE: Half-Duplex ETHERNET PRI LINK MONITOR: Disabled ETHERNET SEC LINK MONITOR: Disabled
Range: Standard IP address format Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Note: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Disabled, Enabled Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Disabled, Enabled Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Network setting messages will appear only if the UR is ordered with an Ethernet card. The Ethernet Primary and Secondary Link Monitor settings allow internal self test targets to be triggered when either the Primary or Secondary ethernet fibre link status indicates a connection loss. The IP addresses are used with DNP/Network, Modbus/TCP, MMS/UCA2, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP (web server) protocols. The NSAP address is used with the MMS/UCA2 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations. They should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required; for example, to allow access to multiple URs behind a router. By setting a different TCP/UCP Port Number for a given protocol on each UR, the router can map the URs to the same external IP address. The client software (URPC, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used. When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP Port Number, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.
WARNING
5-8
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) MODBUS PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
# COMMUNICATIONS # # MODBUS PROTOCOL #

MESSAGE
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see DNP PROTOCOL below). This allows the URPC program to be used. UR relays operate as Modbus slave devices only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the B90 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each B90 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol. d) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" DNP PROTOCOL
# COMMUNICATIONS # # DNP PROTOCOL #

MESSAGE
5
DNP PORT: NONE DNP ADDRESS: 255 # DNP NETWORK # CLIENT ADDRESSES DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER: 20000 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION: Disabled DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT: 5 s DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES: 10 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS: 1 USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS: Disabled DNP CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: 1
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL RS232, NETWORK Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Note:
MESSAGE
Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP POWER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP ENERGY DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD: 1440 min DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE: 240 # DNP BINARY INPUTS # USER MAP
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The B90 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The B90 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to a single DNP master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the B90 maintains one set of DNP data change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the B90 at one time. The DNP PORT setting is used to select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol. DNP can be assigned to a single port only. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to NETWORK, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP. Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the B90 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the B90 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be set to "Disabled" for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the B90 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the B90 will retransmit an unsolicited response without receiving a confirmation from the master. A value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS setting is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the B90 from either the current DNP TCP connection or the most recent UDP message. The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the B90. See Appendix E for more information
5-10
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the B90 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the B90 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger). The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings are the values used by the B90 to determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These settings group the B90 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, in order to trigger unsolicited responses from the B90 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the B90, the default deadbands will be in effect. The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the "Need Time" Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the B90. Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required. The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels. The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default DNP Binary Inputs list on the B90 contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, virtual inputs and outputs, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom Binary Inputs points list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 Binary Input points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents Binary Input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents Binary Input points 32 to 47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings are set to "Not Used", the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The B90 will form the Binary Inputs points list from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of "Not Used". When using either of the User Maps for DNP data points (Analog Inputs and/or Binary Inputs), for UR relays with the ethernet option installed, check the "DNP Points Lists" B90 web page to ensure the desired points lists have been created. This web page can be viewed using Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator by entering the B90 IP address to access the B90 "Main Menu", then by selecting the "Device Information Menu", and then selecting the "DNP Points Lists".
NOTE
e) UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
# COMMUNICATIONS # # UCA/MMS PROTOCOL #

MESSAGE
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s UCA LOGICAL DEVICE: UCADevice UCA/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER: 102
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1 See UserSt BIT PAIRS in the REMOTE OUTPUTS section. Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing the name of the UCA logical device. Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The B90 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by the Utility Communication Architecture (UCA). UCA/MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The B90 operates as a UCA/MMS server. Appendix C describes the UCA/MMS protocol implementation in greater detail. The REMOTE INPUTS / OUTPUT sections of Chapter 5 describe the peer-to-peer GOOSE message scheme. The UCA LOGICAL DEVICE setting represents the MMS domain name (UCA logical device) where all UCA objects are located.
GE Multilin
5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP f) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
5 SETTINGS
# COMMUNICATIONS # # WEB SERVER # HTTP PROTOCOL

MESSAGE
HTTP TCP PORT NUMBER: 80
The B90 contains an embedded web server. That is, the B90 is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the B90 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the B90 "Main Menu". Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the B90 into the "Address" box on the web browser. g) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" TFTP PROTOCOL
# COMMUNICATIONS #
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
# TFTP PROTOCOL # TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER: 69 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 NUMBER: 0 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The B90 operates as a TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The file "dir.txt" is an ASCII text file that can be transferred from the B90. This file contains a list and description of all the files available from the UR (event records, oscillography, etc.). h) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
# COMMUNICATIONS # # IEC 60870-5-104 # PROTOCOL

MESSAGE
IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION: Disabled IEC TCP PORT NUMBER: 2404 IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-12
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD: 60 s IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30 IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC OTHER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The B90 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The B90 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a single master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the B90 maintains one set of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, only one master should actively communicate with the B90 at one time. For situations where a second master is active in a "hot standby" configuration, the UR supports a second IEC 60870-5-104 connection providing the standby master sends only IEC 60870-5-104 Test Frame Activation messages for as long as the primary master is active. The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR, the default thresholds will be in effect. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE
i) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" SNTP PROTOCOL
# COMMUNICATIONS # # SNTP PROTOCOL #

MESSAGE
SNTP FUNCTION: Disabled SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: 0.0.0.0 SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER: 123
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The B90 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) specified in RFC-2030. Using SNTP, the B90 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The B90 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product employing a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time signal. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported. If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the B90 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the B90 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
GE Multilin
5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
To use SNTP in unicast mode, the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting must be set to the IP address of the SNTP/NTP server. Once this address is set and the SNTP FUNCTION setting is set to "Enabled", the B90 will attempt to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since a number of time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the B90 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to one minute for the B90 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline. To use SNTP in broadcast mode, the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting must be set to "0.0.0.0" and the SNTP FUNCTION setting must be "Enabled". The B90 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the "all ones" broadcast address for the subnet. The B90 will wait up to eighteen minutes (greater than 1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error. The UR does not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality. 5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" MODBUS USER MAP
# MODBUS USER MAP #
ADDRESS VALUE:
1: 0
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256: VALUE: 0
The Modbus User Map provides up to 256 registers with read only access. To obtain a value for a memory map address, enter the desired location in the ADDRESS line (the value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value from the is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically return values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions. These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP ANALOG INPUT POINTS section in Appendix E for details.
NOTE
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" REAL TIME CLOCK
# REAL TIME # CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered. See also the COMMANDS " SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.
5-14
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.7 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
# OSCILLOGRAPHY # NUMBER OF RECORDS: 15 TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite TRIGGER POSITION: 50% TRIGGER SOURCE: Off AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: 16 samples/cycle # DIGITAL CHANNELS #
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Range: FlexLogic operand
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
Range: 2 to 63 channels
DIGITAL CHANNEL 1: Off
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Off # ANALOG CHANNELS #
Range: 1 to 16 channels
ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Off
Range: Off, any analog Actual Value parameter
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Off
Range: Off, any analog Actual Value parameter
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously. The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
GE Multilin
5-15
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 51: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

# RECORDS 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 32 # CT/VTS 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 SAMPLE RATE 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 64 64 # DIGITALS 0 16 16 16 16 64 64 64 64 # ANALOGS 0 0 0 4 4 16 16 16 16 CYCLES/ RECORD 1872.0 1685.0 266.0 219.5 93.5 93.5 57.6 32.3 9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to "Automatic Overwrite". The TRIGGER POSITION is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle. The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. Tables of all possible analog metering actual value parameters are presented in Appendix A: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear. When the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting is altered, all oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING
5-16
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.8 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LEDS # TRIP & ALARM # LEDS TRIP LED INPUT: OFF ALARM LED INPUT: OFF # USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LED 1 LED 1 OPERAND: Off LED 1 TYPE: Self-Reset # USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LED 2
Range: FlexLogic operand Range: FlexLogic operand
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LED 48 The TRIP and ALARM LEDs are on LED panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED panel 3.
Refer to the LED INDICATORS section in the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is "Self-Reset" (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts. Table 52: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS
SETTING LED 1 Operand LED 2 Operand LED 3 Operand LED 4 Operand LED 5 Operand LED 6 Operand LED 7 Operand LED 8 Operand LED 9 Operand LED 10 Operand LED 11 Operand LED 12 Operand PARAMETER SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 2 SETTING GROUP ACT 3 SETTING GROUP ACT 4 SETTING GROUP ACT 5 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Off Off Off Off Off Off SETTING LED 13 Operand LED 14 Operand LED 15 Operand LED 16 Operand LED 17 Operand LED 18 Operand LED 19 Operand LED 20 Operand LED 21 Operand LED 22 Operand LED 23 Operand LED 24 Operand PARAMETER Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
User-Programmable Pushbuttons
GE Multilin
5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
5 SETTINGS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE # PUSHBUTTONS # USER PUSHBUTTON 1 # PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBUTTON 1 TARGETS: Disabled PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01
Range: Disabled, Enabled
# USER PUSHBUTTON 2 #
# USER PUSHBUTTON 12 # The B90 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (ON, OFF) into FlexLogic equations as well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protection blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
10
USER LABEL
12
Figure 51: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS Each pushbutton asserts its own ON and OFF FlexLogic operands, respectively. FlexLogic operands should be used to program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF. A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present status of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in nonvolatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss.
5-18
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON. PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to "Disabled", the pushbutton is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both "On" and "Off") are de-asserted. If set to "Self-reset", the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the "On" corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic operand is de-asserted. The "Off" operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly. If set to "Latched", the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between "On" and "Off" on each push of the button. When operating in the "Latched" mode the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay. PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the "on" position. Refer to the USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the "off" position. Refer to the USER DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. The user text is displayed for 5 seconds after each change of pushbutton status. PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting pushbutton in FlexLogic. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling the time window for the intended operation.
For example, consider a relay with the following settings:

PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: "Autorecloser" PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: "Disabled - Call PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: "Enabled"
2199"
When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the "On" position, the following message is displayed: AUTORECLOSER DISABLED - Call 2199 When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the "Off" position, the following message is displayed: AUTORECLOSER ENABLED User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via URPC with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.9 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
# FLEX STATE # PARAMETERS

MESSAGE
PARAMETER Off PARAMETER Off
MESSAGE
1: 2:
Range: FlexLogic Operand
PARAMETER 256: Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers. The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accommodate the 256 state bits. 5.2.10 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
# USER-DEFINABLE # DISPLAYS # USER DISPLAY 1 #

MESSAGE
DISP 1 TOP LINE: DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: DISP 1 ITEM 1 0 DISP 1 ITEM 2 0 DISP 1 ITEM 3 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0 # USER DISPLAY 2 #
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
# USER DISPLAY 8 #
5-20
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 8 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content. Also, any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available User Display by selecting the existing display and pressing the key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message will indicate that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content - this content may subsequently be edited. This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular User Display. Each User Display consists of two 20-character lines (TOP & BOTTOM). The Tilde (~) character is used to mark the start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1...5) can be entered in a User Display - the nth Tilde (~) refers to the nth ITEM. A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the URPC interface (preferred for convenience). To enter text characters in the TOP LINE and BOTTOM LINE from the faceplate keypad: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the line to be edited. Press the key to enter text edit mode.
Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed. The Press the key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information. key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 ITEMs (the decimal form of the selected Modbus Register Address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any ITEMs not being used. Use the key at any selected system display (Setting, Actual Value, or Command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus Register Address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (URPC usage would conveniently facilitate this conversion). Use the key to go to the USER DISPLAYS menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a User Display, press the key and then select the Yes option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the USER DISPLAYS menu. EXAMPLE USER DISPLAY SETUP AND RESULT: # USER DISPLAY 1 #
MESSAGE
DISP 1 TOP LINE: Current X ~ A DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Current Y ~ A DISP 1 ITEM 1: 6016 DISP 1 ITEM 2: 6357 DISP 1 ITEM 3: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker. Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAYS
Current X Current Y
0.850 A 0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
GE Multilin
5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.11 DIRECT I/O
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O
# DIRECT I/O #
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 64 kbps
Range: 1 to 8
Range: Yes, No
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
Direct I/Os are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR relays connected directly via Type-7 UR digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to UCA GOOSE, except that communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that support two channels, Direct Output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends Direct Output messages both ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, Direct Output messages are sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver. Direct Output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at least every 500 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by the following FlexLogic operands: 1. DIRECT RING BREAK (Direct I/O Ring Break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that Direct Output messages sent from a UR are not being received back by the UR. DIRECT DEVICE X OFF (Direct Device Offline). This FlexLogic operand indicates that Direct Output messages from at least one Direct Device are not being received.
2.
Direct I/O settings are similar to Remote I/O settings. The equivalent of the Remote Device name strings for Direct I/O, is the Direct Output Device ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies this UR in all Direct Output messages. All UR IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of the Direct I/O message. If the Direct I/O scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"), all Direct Output messages should be received back. If not, the Direct I/O Ring Break Self Test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand. Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of the local relays may be set to 128 kbps. All IEDs communicating over Direct I/Os must be set to the same data rate. UR IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for Direct I/O messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each "bridge". For B90 applications, the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE should be set to 128 kbps. The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for Direct I/O configuration. Please refer to the INPUTS/ OUTPUTS section later in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged. EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE I/O CAPABILITIES OF A UR RELAY Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
5-22
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Figure 52: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes" DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps" DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes" DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
UR IED 2:
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber, G.703, or RS422). EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1
BLOCK
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 53: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX1
UR IED 2
TX1 RX2 TX2
UR IED 4
RX1
TX2
RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 54: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT I/OS In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
GE Multilin
5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP UR IED 1: UR IED 2: UR IED 3: UR IED 4:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "4" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
5 SETTINGS
"Yes" "Yes" "Yes" "Yes"
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of "bridges" between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum "communications distance" by a factor of two. In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings, failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the Direct I/O feature would be primarily used to address these concerns. EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 55: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
5-24
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 TX1
UR IED 2
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 56: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 2: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
"Yes" "Yes" "Yes"
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps): IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 RX2 TX2
UR IED 2
TX1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 57: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 2: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
"Yes" "Yes" "Yes"
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
GE Multilin
5-25
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.12 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION
# INSTALLATION #
MESSAGE
RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed RELAY NAME: Relay-1
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state. The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the UCA2/MMS protocol.
5-26
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.3SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT TERMINALS

PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS ! CURRENT TERMINAL F1(S8)
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS
# CURRENT # TERMINAL F1
MESSAGE
CT F1 PRIMARY: 65000 A CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
Range: 1 A, 5 A
This menu configures the AC current inputs. Upon power up, the B90 recognizes all the AC modules loaded in its chassis and populates the above menu accordingly. The current terminals are denoted in the following format: Xa, where X = {F, L, S} and a = (1, 2,..., 8}. X represents the chassis slot containing the AC input module and a represents the AC channel of each module. For example, a B90 unit containing the F8C and L8E modules displays the following current inputs for configuration: F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and L7. b) VOLTAGE TERMINALS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE TERMINAL F1(S8)
# VOLTAGE # TERMINAL F1
MESSAGE
VT F1 SECONDARY: 66.4 V VT F1 RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 :1 in steps of 1.00
This menu configures the AC voltage inputs. Upon power up, the B90 recognizes all the AC modules loaded in its chassis and populates the above menu accordingly. The voltage terminals are denoted in the following format: Xa, where X = {F, L, S} and a = (5, 6, 7, 8}. X represents the chassis slot containing the AC input module and a represents the AC channel of each module. For example, a B90 unit containing the F8A and L8E modules displays the following voltage inputs: F5, F6, F7, F8, and L8. The nominal VT F1 SECONDARY setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM

PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM
# POWER SYSTEM #
MESSAGE
NOMINAL FREQUENCY: 60 Hz FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE: F1 FREQUENCY TRACKING: Enabled
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
Range: available CT and VT channels
MESSAGE
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay. The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal is used for phase angle reference.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE
should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.
GE Multilin
5-27
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.3.3 FLEXCURVES
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" FLEXCURVES ! FLEXCURVE A(D)
# FLEXCURVE A #
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 / 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D). Table 53: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 TIME MS RESET 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 TIME MS OPERATE 1.03 1.05 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 TIME MS OPERATE 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 TIME MS OPERATE 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 TIME MS OPERATE 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 TIME MS
0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66
NOTE
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
5-28
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS a) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH URPC
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
URPC allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From URPC setting. Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup. b) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From URPC setting is set to "Recloser Curve" and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time. High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the operating time.
Figure 58: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-29
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP c) EXAMPLE
5 SETTINGS
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
Figure 59: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
Figure 510: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the URPC software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
d) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES The standard Recloser curves available for the B90 are displayed in the following graphs.
5-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
2 1 0.5
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.2 0.1 0.05
GE103 GE104 GE105
GE101
GE102
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
Figure 511: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
50
GE142
20 10 5
GE138
TIME (sec)
2 1
GE113 GE120
0.5
0.2 0.1 0.05 1
1.2
1.5
2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
Figure 512: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
GE Multilin
5-31
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
50
20
10 TIME (sec)
GE201
GE151
2
GE134 GE140 GE137
0.5 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
Figure 513: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
20 TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
GE200
2 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
Figure 514: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
5-32
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
50 20 10 5 2
GE162
GE164
TIME (sec)
1 0.5
GE133
0.2 0.1 0.05

GE161
GE165
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2
GE163
15
20
Figure 515: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20 10 5 2 TIME (sec) 1 0.5 0.2
GE132
GE139
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118
GE117
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
Figure 516: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
GE Multilin
5-33
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
20 10 5
GE122
2 TIME (sec) 1 0.5

GE114
0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
GE121 GE111
GE107
GE115
GE112
Figure 517: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10 TIME (sec) 5
2 1 0.5
GE119
GE135
0.2 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
Figure 518: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
5-34
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.4 BUS ZONE
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BUS ! BUS ZONE 1(4)
# BUS ZONE 1 # # BUS ZONE 1 INPUT A # BUS 1A CT: F1 BUS 1A DIRECTION: IN BUS 1A STATUS: Off # BUS ZONE 1 INPUT B #
Range: available CT channels
Range: IN, OUT
# BUS ZONE 1 INPUT X # # BUS ZONE 2 # # BUS ZONE 3 # # BUS ZONE 4 # The number of available zones and their size (maximum number of inputs) are optional and controlled by the software option portion of the order code. Please refer to the ORDERING section in Chapter 2 for detailed information on the maximum number of zones and inputs for a given B90 model. Four bus differential zones are available. Each zone is associated with its own bus differential protection and CT trouble monitoring elements. A differential zone is defined by up to 24 pairs of current inputbus connection status values. BUS 1A CT: This setting defines a current input to the zone. Selections include all the CT channels available in the relay as per configured hardware. The protected bus zone is uniquely identified as the portion of the bus between the selected current sources (CTs). BUS 1A DIRECTION: This setting configures the CT orientation with respect to the protected zone. Bus Differential and CT Trouble decisions are based on current summation and thus correct orientation selection is important. The figure below shows a tie-breaker dividing a single bus into two sections, defined as Zone 1 and Zone 2. The tie-breaker CT (F5) is common to both zones and therefore the respective direction settings are opposite. The CT polarity dots are in relation to the protected zone and are terminated to the "common" of the tapped (1 A / 5 A) inputs. The polarity dots for the Zone 2 CTs face outward with respect to the bus; as such, the F5 to F8 direction settings are "IN". Similarly, the F1 to F4 CTs for Zone 1 are selected as "IN". However, the polarity dot orientation for the F5 CT faces inward with respect to Zone 1 and therefore the BUS 1E DIRECTION setting is "OUT". BUS 1A STATUS: This setting dynamically defines a connection status of a given feeder with respect to the differential zone (dynamic bus replica). If a given feeder is connected to the zone and its current included into differential calculations, the FlexLogic operand used for this setting is "On"; if the current is excluded, the FlexLogic operand is "Off". Typically, this setting is an appropriately filtered position of an isolator, a breaker or a tie-breaker. In the case of an isolator connecting a feeder to a given section of a bus, the Isolator Monitoring feature produces a reliable isolator position operand (ISOLATOR n POSITION). Typically, the Isolator Monitoring feature is enabled in the fourth B90 IED and the ISOLATOR n POSITION status operand must be sent over Direct I/O communications before it may be configured as a BUS ZONE 1~STATUS setting.
GE Multilin
5-35
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
ZONE 1
F5
ZONE 2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
F7
F8
ZONE 1: BUS 1A CT = F1 BUS 1A DIRECTION = IN BUS 1B CT = F2 BUS 1B DIRECTION = IN BUS 1C CT = F3 BUS 1C DIRECTION = IN BUS 1D CT = F4 BUS 1D DIRECTION = IN BUS 1E CT = F5 BUS 1E DIRECTION = OUT
ZONE 2: BUS 2A CT = F5 BUS 2A DIRECTION = IN BUS 2B CT = F6 BUS 2B DIRECTION = IN BUS 2C CT = F7 BUS 2C DIRECTION = IN BUS 2D CT = F8 BUS 2D DIRECTION = IN
836757A2.CDR
Figure 519: BUS ZONE DIRECTION SETTING For example, assume that B90 IED 4 is used for isolator monitoring while IEDs 1, 2, and 3 are used for protection. Consequently, the B90 FUNCTION setting of IED 4 must be set to "Logic" while B90 FUNCTION on the IEDs 1, 2 and 3 must be set to "Protection". Normally open and closed auxiliary switches of a given isolator must be wired to the IED 4, and the Isolator feature must be enabled and configured appropriately. Assume the isolator shown below is monitored by the Isolator 1 feature. The ISOLATOR 1 POSITION is the FlexLogic operand asserted by the Isolator 1 monitoring element. This operand must be configured to drive a Direct Output in order to send the connection status to IEDs 1, 2, and 3 where the bus replica is being utilized by differential protection. Assume Bit 12 of the message originating at IED 4 is used for this purpose. This is achieved by applying the following settings:
For IED 4:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "4" (this is the originating DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND: "ISOLATOR 1 POSITION"
device) (this operand drives output number 12)
The above information is to be received by IEDs 1, 2, and 3. Assume Direct Input 68 is to reflect the isolator position. For IEDs 1, 2, and 3: DIRECT INPUT 68 DEVICE: "4" (message received from IED 4) DIRECT INPUT 68 BIT NUMBER: "12" (using bit number 12) Once received, the Isolator 1 status (known on IEDs 1, 2, and 3 as DIRECT INPUT 68 On) is used for bus configuration: For IEDs 1, 2, and 3: BUS 1E CT: "F7" (the current wired to the F7 terminal) BUS 1E STATUS: "DIRECT INPUT 68 On"
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
ISO 1
normally open and closed auxiliary switches
ISOLATOR 1 POSITION
IED 4
sent as bit no.12 from IED no.4
phase A current, wired to F7
IED 1
phase B current, wired to F7
IED 2
phase C current, wired to F7
IED 3
Received as DIRECT INPUT 68 On BUS 1E CT = F7 BUS 1E STATUS = DIRECT INPUT 68 On
836 8A2 CDR
Figure 520: DIRECT I/O SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA In the case of a breaker (or a tie-breaker), a breaker closed position with a dropout time of 40 to 60 ms is typically used as a connection status to avoid over-tripping and/or dead-zones, depending on the relative position of the breaker and CT. Refer to the APPLICATIONS OF SETTINGS chapter for more details on configuring bus differential zones.
5-36
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4FLEXLOGIC
5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 521: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW The states of all digital signals used in the UR are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in this section). A digital "1" is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators. If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a "virtual output" which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations. Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
GE Multilin
5-37
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic). FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback. A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a VIRTUAL OUTPUT flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (= ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (= OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle. Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below. Table 54: UR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE Contact Input STATE On Off EXAMPLE FORMAT Cont Ip On Cont Ip Off Cont Op 1 VOn Cont Op 1 VOff Cont Op 1 IOn Cont Op 1 IOff DIRECT INPUT 1 On PHASE TOC1 PKP CHARACTERISTICS [INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...] Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed). Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open). Voltage exists across the contact. Voltage does not exists across the contact. Current is flowing through the contact. Current is not flowing through the contact. The direct input is presently in the ON state. The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The output of the comparator is set to the block function. The input operand is at logic 1. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The number of pulses counted is above the set number. The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number. The number of pulses counted is below the set number. Logic 1 Logic 0 The remote input is presently in the ON state. The virtual input is presently in the ON state. The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").
Contact Output (type Form-A contact only)
Voltage On Voltage Off Current On Current Off
Direct Input Element (Analog)
On Pickup
Dropout Operate
PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 OP
Block Element (Digital) Pickup Dropout Operate
PH DIR1 BLK Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 1 OP
Element (Digital Counter)
Higher than Equal to Lower than On Off On On On
Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO On Off REMOTE INPUT 1 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Op 1 On
Fixed Remote Input Virtual Input Virtual Output
5-38
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table. Table 55: B90 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (SHEET 1 OF 2)
OPERAND TYPE DIRECT DEVICES OPERAND SYNTAX DIRECT DEVICE 1 On DIRECT DEVICE 8 On DIRECT DEVICE 1 Off DIRECT DEVICE 8 Off BKRFAIL 1 RETRIP BKRFAIL 1 T1 OP BKRFAIL 1 T2 OP BKRFAIL 1 T3 OP BKRFAIL 1 TRIP OP BKRSUPV 1 SUPV OP BKRSUPV 1 HISET OP BKRSUPV 1 LOSET OP BKRFAIL 1 to BKRFAIL 24 BKRSUPV1 to BKRSUPV 24 ELEMENT: Bus Differential BUS 1 BIASED PKP BUS 1 BIASED DPO BUS 1 BIASED OP BUS 1 UNBIASED OP BUS 1 OP BUS 1 DIR BUS 1 SAT ELEMENT: CT Trouble CT TROUBLE 1 OP CT TROUBLE 2 OP CT TROUBLE 3 OP CT TROUBLE 4 OP Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 OP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 16 PKP Dig Element 16 OP Dig Element 16 DPO EFP n PKP EFP n DPO EFP n OP IOC n PKP IOC n DPO IOC n OP ISOLATOR n POSITION ISOLATOR n ALARM ISOLATOR n BLOCK LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF LATCH 16 ON LATCH 16 OFF SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 TOC n PKP TOC n DPO TOC n OP UNDERVOLTAGE n PKP UNDERVOLTAGE n DPO UNDERVOLTAGE n OP Off On OPERAND DESCRIPTION Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Re-trip issued by the BF 1 protection Timer No. 1 of the BF 1 protection expired Timer No. 2 of the BF 1 protection expired Timer No. 3 of the BF 1 protection expired BF 1 has operated Overcurrent supervision of the BF 1 operated High-set overcurrent supervision of the BF 1 operated Low-set overcurrent supervision of the BF 1 operated Same set of operands as shown for BKRFAIL1 Same set of operands as shown for BKRSUPV 1
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
ELEMENT Breaker Failure
The biased bus differential element for Zone 1 has picked up The biased bus differential element for Zone 1 has dropped out The biased bus differential element for Zone 1 has operated The unbiased bus differential element for Zone 1 has operated The bus differential element for Zone 1 has operated The directional unit for the Zone 1 bus differential element has issued permission to operate The saturation detector for the Zone 1 bus differential element has detected external fault conditions CT Trouble has been detected for Bus Differential Zone 1 CT Trouble has been detected for Bus Differential Zone 2 CT Trouble has been detected for Bus Differential Zone 3 CT Trouble has been detected for Bus Differential Zone 4 Digital Element 1 is picked up Digital Element 1 is operated Digital Element 1 is dropped out Digital Element 16 is picked up Digital Element 16 is operated Digital Element 16 is dropped out The n-th End Fault Protection element has picked up The n-th End Fault Protection element has dropped out The n-th End Fault Protection element has operated The n-th Instantaneous Overcurrent element has picked up The n-th Instantaneous Overcurrent element has dropped out The n-th Instantaneous Overcurrent element has operated Position of the n-th isolator (ON = closed; OFF = open) Contact discrepancy detected for the n-th isolator Blocking signal for substation switching operations set due to contact discrepancy of the n-th isolator (acknowledgeable) Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0) Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0) Setting Group 1 is active Setting Group 6 is active The n-th Time Overcurrent element has picked up The n-th Time Overcurrent element has dropped out The n-th Time Overcurrent element has operated The n-th Undervoltage element has picked up The n-th Undervoltage element has dropped out The n-th Undervoltage element has operated Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as Disable by other features. Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
ELEMENT: Digital Element
ELEMENT: End Fault Protection ELEMENT: IOC ELEMENT Isolator Monitoring
ELEMENT Non-Volatile Latches
ELEMENT: Setting Group ELEMENT TOC ELEMENT: Undervoltage FIXED OPERANDS
GE Multilin
5-39
5.4 FLEXLOGIC Table 55: B90 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (SHEET 2 OF 2)

OPERAND TYPE INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Inputs OPERAND SYNTAX Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 On On Off Off IOn IOn IOff IOff VOn VOn VOff VOff OPERAND DESCRIPTION (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1
5 SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Outputs, Current (from detector on Form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Outputs, Voltage (from detector on Form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS Direct Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Remote Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual Inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On DIRECT INPUT 96 On REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Ip 32 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 64 On REMOTE DEVICE 1 On REMOTE DEVICE 16 On REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual Outputs REMOTE DEVICES
RESETTING
RESET OP RESET OP (COMMS) RESET OP (OPERAND) RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below) Communications source of the reset command Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu) source of the reset command Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error) Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error) Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error) See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. See description in the COMMANDS chapter. Pushbutton Number x is in the On position Pushbutton Number x is in the Off position
SELFDIAGNOSTICS
ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY MINOR ERROR ANY SELF-TEST LOW ON MEMORY WATCHDOG ERROR PROGRAM MEMORY EEPROM DATA ERROR PRI ETHERNET FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL BATTERY FAIL SYSTEM EXCEPTION UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED EQUIPMENT MISMATCH FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE UNIT NOT CALIBRATED NO DSP INTERRUPTS DSP ERROR IRIG-B FAILURE REMOTE DEVICE OFF DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK SNTP FAILURE PUSHBUTTON x ON PUSHBUTTION x OFF
USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
5-40
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/ ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table above. The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS table. Table 56: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES NOT OR AND NOR NAND XOR NUMBER OF INPUTS 1 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF... input is 0 any input is 1 all inputs are 1 all inputs are 0 any input is 0 only one input is 1
Table 57: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

OPERATOR TYPE Editor End OPERATOR SYNTAX INSERT DELETE END DESCRIPTION Insert a parameter in an equation list. Delete a parameter from an equation list. The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of FlexLogic parameters that is processed. One shot that responds to a positive going edge. One shot that responds to a negative going edge. One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges. Logical Not 2 input OR gate 16 input OR gate 2 input AND gate 16 input AND gate NOR(2) NOR(16) NAND(2) NAND(16) XOR(2) LATCH (S,R) 2 input NOR gate 16 input NOR gate 2 input NAND gate 16 input NAND gate 2 input Exclusive OR gate Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the Reset input. The parameter preceding the Reset input is the Set input. The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is TIMER #. A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a one shot is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of 32 one shots. Operates on the previous parameter. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. NOTES
One Shot
POSITIVE ONE SHOT NEGATIVE ONE SHOT DUAL ONE SHOT
Logic Gate
NOT OR(2) OR(16) AND(2) AND(16)
Timer
TIMER 1 TIMER 32
Timer as configured with FlexLogic Timer 1 settings. Timer as configured with FlexLogic Timer 32 settings. Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual Output 1. Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual Output 64.
Assign Virtual Output
= Virt Op 1 = Virt Op 64
The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter
GE Multilin
5-41
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS 5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared. 5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered. FLEXLOGIC PROVIDES LATCHES WHICH BY DEFINITION HAVE A MEMORY ACTION, REMAINING IN THE SET STATE AFTER THE SET INPUT HAS BEEN ASSERTED. HOWEVER, THEY ARE VOLATILE; I.E. THEY RESET ON THE RE-APPLICATION OF CONTROL POWER. WHEN MAKING CHANGES TO PROGRAMMING, ALL FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ARE RE-COMPILED WHEN ANY NEW SETTING IS ENTERED, SO ALL LATCHES ARE AUTOMATICALLY RESET. IF IT IS REQUIRED TO RE-INITIALIZE FLEXLOGIC DURING TESTING, FOR EXAMPLE, IT IS SUGGESTED TO POWER THE UNIT DOWN AND THEN BACK UP.
CAUTION
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC PROCEDURE EXAMPLE This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation. In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output used a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND Timer 1 Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827025A2.vsd
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) Operate Output Relay H1
Figure 522: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME 1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect inputs 1 through 16 to one AND(16), 17 through 25 to another AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to a third AND(2).
5-42
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output. For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1). Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND Timer 1 Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
Figure 523: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS 2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND(2) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
Figure 524: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup Timer 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 State=ON CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms)
827028A2.VSD
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
Figure 525: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
GE Multilin
5-43
5.4 FLEXLOGIC 4.
5 SETTINGS
Program the FlexLogic equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01 02 03 04 05
.....
97 98 99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 526: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET 5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows: 99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3." 98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower. 97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next. 96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact. The operand is therefore "Cont Ip H1c On". 95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP". Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3: [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3
5-44
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 as a check.
95 96 97 98 99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 2 OP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: NOT FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: AND (2) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 3
AND
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 527: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4. 99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4". 98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section. 97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3). 96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1". 94: The input to Timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R). 92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter OR(4). 91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2). 89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP. 88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On". 87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On". 86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On". 85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On". The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is: [85] [86] [87] [88] [89] [90] [91] [92] [93] [94] [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4
GE Multilin
5-45
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4, as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 4 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 2 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Ip 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 1 PKP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: XOR FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (4) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: LATCH (S,R) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 1 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (3) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 2 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 4
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
Set LATCH XOR OR Reset
OR
T2
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
T1
97 98 99
827031A2.VSD
Figure 528: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the required logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform considerable logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems because all of the logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service. In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below: DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On
5-46
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4 END
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct. 8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past. Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator. The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations. 5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC ! FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
# FLEXLOGIC # EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END
1:
Range: FlexLogic parameters
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: END
Range: FlexLogic parameters
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types. 5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ! FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
# FLEXLOGIC # TIMER 1
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0 TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: 0
Range: millisecond, second, minute
MESSAGE
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available, numbered from 1 to 32. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations. TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit. TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting is used to set the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0". TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
GE Multilin
5-47
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS 5.4.7 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
# NON-VOLATILE # LATCHES # LATCH 1 # PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled LATCH 1 TYPE: Reset Dominant LATCH 1 SET: Off LATCH 1 RESET: Off LATCH 1 TARGET: Self-reset LATCH 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
# LATCH 2 #
# LATCH 16 # The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below: LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant. LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1. LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
LATCH N TYPE Reset Dominant LATCH N SET ON OFF ON OFF Set Dominant ON ON OFF OFF LATCH N RESET OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON LATCH N ON ON Previous State OFF OFF ON ON Previous State OFF LATCH N OFF OFF Previous State ON
SETTING SETTING LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING LATCH 1 TYPE: RUN SET
ON
LATCH 1 SET:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LATCH LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF
OFF OFF Previous State ON
Off = 0 SETTING LATCH 1 RESET: Off = 0
RESET
Figure 529: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 TO 16) AND LOGIC
5-48
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6. The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration, season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the CONTROL ELEMENTS section). See also the INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS section at the front of this chapter. 5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6)
# SETTING GROUP 1 #
MESSAGE
# BUS DIFFERENTIAL # # BREAKER FAILURE # # END FAULT # PROTECTION # CURRENT ELEMENTS # # VOLTAGE ELEMENTS #
See below. See page 5-54. See page 5-62. See page 5-64. See page 5-71.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Each of the 6 setting group menus is identical. Setting Group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if no other group is active (see Section 5.6.2: SETTING GROUPS on page 573 for further details). 5.5.3 BUS DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! BUS DIFFERENTIAL
# BUS DIFFERENTIAL # # BUS ZONE 1 # DIFFERENTIAL BUS ZONE 1 DIF FUNCTION: Disabled BUS ZONE 1 DIF PICKUP: 0.100 pu BUS ZONE 1 DIF LOW SLOPE: 25% BUS ZONE 1 DIF LOW BPNT: 2.00 pu BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH SLOPE: 60% BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH BPNT: 8.00 pu BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH SET: 15.00 pu BUS ZONE 1 DIF SEAL-IN: 0.400 s
Range: 0.050 to 2.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1
Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1
GE Multilin
5-49
5 SETTINGS
BUS ZONE 1 DIF SUPV: On BUS ZONE 1 DIF TRIP: Off BUS ZONE 1 DIF BLK: Off BUS ZONE 1 DIF TARGET: Latched BUS ZONE 1 DIF EVENTS: Disabled # BUS ZONE 2 # DIFFERENTIAL # BUS ZONE 3 # DIFFERENTIAL # BUS ZONE 4 # DIFFERENTIAL
Up to four zones of bus differential protection are provided, depending on the software options. The operation of these elements is completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica, which must be defined first. Both restrained (biased) and unrestrained (unbiased, instantaneous) bus differential protection functions are provided for each bus differential zone.
The biased bus differential function has a dual-slope operating characteristic (see figure below) operating in conjunction with saturation detection and a directional comparison principle (refer to the BUS ZONE 1 DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC figure in this section).
|Id|
differential
OPERATE
HIGH SLOPE
BLOCK
LOW SLOPE HIGH BPNT LOW BPNT
PICKUP
Ir
restraining
836720A1.CDR
Figure 530: BIASED DIFFERENTIAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC The protected zone input current with the highest magnitude is used as the restraining signal. Stability during heavy external faults is achieved by dynamic CT saturation detection and current flow direction supervision without affecting sensitivity and speed of operation for internal faults. The differential operating characteristic is divided into two regions. In the region of low differential currents and lower slope, the element operates on a 2-out-of-2 basis, applying both the differential and current directional tests. In the region of high differential currents, the element operates on a dynamic 1-out-of-2 / 2-out-of-2 basis. If the differential current is in this region and CT saturation is detected, both the differential and current directional tests are applied. If CT saturation is ruled out by the saturation detector, the differential protection principle alone is capable of causing the element to operate.
5-50
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The saturation detector is an integral part of the bus differential element. It has no settings but uses some of the differential characteristic parameters. The flags indicating CT saturation are available on a per phase basis as FlexLogic operands. The directional principle is an integral part of the biased bus differential element and has no associated settings. The directional element dynamically identifies what appears to be the faulted circuit and compares its current angle with that of the sum of the remaining currents of the protected zone. The element declares a bus fault if the angle is less than 90. Directional indicating flags signal operation on a per-phase basis and are available as FlexLogic operands. The unbiased bus differential function checks the magnitude of the differential current against an adjustable threshold. Neither the bias nor the directional principles apply. The operation of the unbiased differential function is associated with separate output operands. More information can be found in the THEORY OF OPERATION chapter. The Bus Differential protection feature is available only when PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". Operation of this element is completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica which must be first defined under BUS ZONE 1. The bus differential element 1 protects the differential zone defined as BUS ZONE 1. BUS ZONE 1 DIF PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation of the biased bus differential protection element. This setting is chosen based on the maximum magnitude of the differential current that might be seen under no-load conditions. This setting prevents relay maloperation in the situation when the bus carries little power and the restraining signal is too low to provide enough bias in the first slope region of the differential characteristic. This setting may also be set above the maximum load level to ensure security during CT trouble conditions. However, voltage supervision or a check-zone are better alternatives. BUS ZONE 1 DIF LOW SLOPE: This setting defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents, from zero to the lower breakpoint (LOW BPNT). This setting determines the sensitivity of the relay for low current internal faults. The value chosen should be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from inaccuracy of the CTs operating in their linear mode, i.e. in load conditions and during distant external faults. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal used by the biased bus differential protection element is created as the maximum of all the input currents. BUS ZONE 1 DIF LOW BPNT: This setting defines the lower breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic. The percentage bias applied for the restraining current from zero to the value specified as LOW BPNT is given by the LOW SLOPE setting. This setting should be set above the maximum load current. The LOW BPNT may be moved to the AC current under which all the CTs are guaranteed to transform without saturation. This includes the effect of residual magnetism. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum of all the input currents. BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH SLOPE: This setting defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents above the higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT). This setting affects stability of the relay for heavy external faults. Traditionally, the value chosen for this setting should be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from saturation of the CTs during heavy external faults. This requirement may be considerably relaxed in favor of sensitivity and speed of operation as the relay detects CT saturation and upon detection applies the directional principle to prevent maloperation. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum of all the input currents. BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH BPNT: This setting defines the higher breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic. The percentage bias applied for the restraining current above the value specified as HIGH BPNT is given by the HIGH SLOPE setting. The HIGH BPNT setting should be set below the minimum AC current that is likely to saturate the weakest CT feeding the relay. When adjusting this setting, it must be kept in that mind the restraining signal is created as the maximum of all the input currents. The dual-slope operating characteristic of the biased bus differential protection element is shaped to ensure true percentage bias for high restraining currents (see the following Figure). This means that the straight line defining the upper slope intersects the origin of the differential-restraining plane and a discontinuity appears between the low and high slope regions (between the LOW BPNT and HIGH BPNT settings). This discontinuity is handled by approximating the operate/no-operate boundary of the characteristic using a certain gluing function. This ensures smooth transition of the slope from LOW SLOPE (lower value) to HIGH SLOPE (higher value). The following parameters of the biased operating characteristic are used by the saturation detector: LOW SLOPE, HIGH SLOPE, and HIGH BPNT. The saturation detector uses these settings to detect specific relations between the differential and restraining currents. The values of these settings should be selected based on the aforementioned criteria related to the art of bus differential protection.
GE Multilin
5-51
5 SETTINGS
BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH SET: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation of the unbiased bus differential protection function. This setting is based on the maximum magnitude of the differential current that might be seen during heavy external faults causing deep CT saturation. When selecting this setting, keep in mind that the unbiased bus differential protection function uses the full-cycle Fourier measuring algorithm and applies it to pre-filtered samples of the input currents. As a result, the transient measuring errors including the effect of the DC component are below 2%. During heavy CT saturation when the currents are significantly distorted, the magnitude of the differential current as measured by the relay and used by the unbiased bus differential function is significantly lower than both the peak values of the waveform and the true RMS value. The measured magnitude practically reflects the power system frequency component alone. This allows for lower values of the HIGH SET setting. The unbiased (high set) differential function can be virtually disabled by setting its operating threshold, HIGH SET, very high.
BUS ZONE 1 DIF SEAL-IN: This setting defines the drop-out time of the seal-in timer applied to the BUS 1 OP FlexLogic operand. BUS ZONE 1 DIF SUPV: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand that supervises operation of the element. Typical applications include undervoltage condition and overall (check) zone. In a sense the setting is similar to the blocking input, but does not stop the element from running. This is important for saturation detector, as the latter requires some historical data. The Bus Differential element shall not be supervised from the blocking input. The blocking input (BUS ZONE 1 DIF BLK setting) is meant to block the element permanently, not dynamically from a fault depended condition such as undervoltage. BUS ZONE 1 DIF TRIP: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand that forces operation of the zone. Typical applications include forced trip of the healthy phase from the faulted phase, or a trip command from the BF function to isolate the entire zone of busbar protection.
More information on the Bus Zone Differential settings can be found in the APPLICATION OF SETTINGS chapter.
5-52
GE Multilin
AND
BUS ZONE 1 DIF LOW SLOPE: BUS ZONE 1 DIF TRIP: OR Off = 0 BUS ZONE 1 DIF LOW BPNT: BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH SLOPE: BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH BPNT: RUN ID1
AND
...
AND
restraining
differential
SETTING OR
Current Phasor IR1
differential
Current Samples
restraining
AND
BUS 1X STATUS:
OR
DIFERENTIAL (D) AND RESTRAINING (R) CURRENTS
Figure 531: BUS ZONE 1 DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC

OR CURRENT DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT SATURATION DETECTOR
GE Multilin
SETTING BUS ZONE 1 DIF HIGH SET: RUN | ID1 | > HIGH SET SETTING SETTINGS BUS ZONE 1 DIF PICKUP: On = 1 SETTING BUS ZONE 1 DIF SUPV: SETTING BUS ZONE 1 DIF SEAL-IN: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND tRST BUS 1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BUS 1 UNBIASED OP
SETTING
5 SETTINGS
B90 FUNCTION:
Logic = 0
Protection = 1
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1 DIF FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
BUS ZONE 1 DIF BLOCK:
Off = 0
SETTING
BUS 1A CT:
Current Phasor
Current Samples
SETTING
BUS 1A STATUS:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BUS 1 BIASED OP
BUS 1X CT:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BUS 1 BIASED PKP BUS 1 BIASED DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BUS 1 DIR
SETTING
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BUS 1 SAT

836001A3.vsd
5-53
5 SETTINGS 5.5.4 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" BREAKER FAILURE 1(24)
# BREAKER FAILURE # # BREAKER FAILURE # CURRENT SUPV 1

MESSAGE
BF1 CURRENT SUPV FUNCTION: Disabled BF1 CT: F1 BF1 AMP SUPV PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 AMP HISET PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 AMP LOSET PICKUP: 1.050 pu # BREAKER FAILURE 1 #
Range: Available current channels
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BF1 FUNCTION: Disabled BF1 INITIATE: Off BF1 USE AMP SUPV: Yes BF1 USE SEAL-IN: Yes BF1 AMP SUPV OP A: Off BF1 AMP SUPV OP B: Off BF1 AMP SUPV OP C: Off BF1 USE TIMER 1: Yes BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 USE TIMER 2: Yes BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 USE TIMER 3: Yes
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
5-54
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 BKR POS1: Off BF1 BKR POS2: Off BF1 BKR TEST ON: Off BF1 AMP HISET OP A: Off BF1 AMP HISET OP B: Off BF1 AMP HISET OP C: Off BF1 AMP LOSET OP A: Off BF1 AMP LOSET OP B: Off BF1 AMP LOSET OP C: Off BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 TRIP DROPOUT TIME DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 RETRIP TIME DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 BLOCK: Off BF1 TARGET: Self-Reset BF1 EVENTS: Disabled # BREAKER FAILURE # CURRENT SUPV 2 # BREAKER FAILURE 2 #

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 1 Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
# BREAKER FAILURE # CURRENT SUPV 24 # BREAKER FAILURE 24 # The Breaker Failure feature has two parts: Breaker Failure Current Supervision and Breaker Failure Logic. Breaker Failure Current Supervision acts upon current levels and is available if the PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION setting is "Protection". Breaker Failure Logic is based on status information and is available if the PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNC-
GE Multilin
5-55
5 SETTINGS
TION ! B90 FUNCTION setting is "Logic". The Breaker Failure element requires B90 fiber optic interconnection and proper configuration of the Breaker Failure and Direct I/O settings. Refer to the APPLICATION OF SETTINGS chapter for additional details.
BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION: In general, breaker failure schemes expect that the breaker receiving the trip command opens within a set time. If it does not, upstream or adjacent breakers are tripped to effectively clear the fault. This widespread tripping usually interrupts power to a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. A higher level of security is required due to the effect on system safety and stability. The Breaker Failure scheme is intended for three-pole operation but can be used with single-pole tripping if certain conditions are satisfied (see the Note below). The operation of the Breaker Failure element includes three stages: initiation, identification of a breaker failure condition, and output (or response). The Breaker Failure can be used with single-pole tripping schemes if the HISET and LOSET current elements are set below the lowest expected fault current and above the highest expected load current.
NOTE
STAGE 1: INITIATION The Breaker Failure scheme is initiated by a FlexLogic operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker. This signal does not include other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected zone. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the fault is cleared. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it resets when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic timer set longer than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Breaker failure scheme can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current supervised initiate results in the breaker failure element not being initiate for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for transformer faults or ring bus where unequal current division between ring bus circuit breakers can delay the failed breaker clearing time until the healthy ring breaker has operated. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature should be used for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used. If this choice is made the current supervision pickup level must be lower than the minimum fault current flowing through the breaker. Immediately after scheme initiation it will send again trip signal to the breaker (re-trip). This is intended to reduce the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker. STAGE 2: DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION Improved flexibility is achieved by providing three timers or stages (Timers 1, 2, and 3) as shown in the BREAKER FAILURE LOGIC diagram. Each stage is individually enabled and asserts its individual operand. Only a breaker auxiliary contact (fast-operating) or current supervision (if enabled) can reset Timer 1 (early stage). If Timer 1 expires, it implies that current is still flowing or the breaker (position status) is still closed; that is, the breaker failed to open. The Timer 2 (main stage) logic is not supervised by breaker status, only by current. An output is issued if current is detected after the Timer 2 delay interval. This stage detects the condition where a breaker opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current. The HISET and LOSET settings discriminate between the pre- and post-tripping current variation for breakers that employ opening resistors. If the current level is between HISET and LOSET, a time delay (BF x LOSET TIME DELAY) is added. For currents above the HISET value, the BFxx LOSET TIME DELAY timer is bypassed. The BF x LOSET TIME DELAY is based on the time that breaker resistor limited current can flow through the circuit after the breaker interruption time. Both current detectors provide fast operating time for small multiples of the pickup setting. The Timer 3 (slow stage) is supervised by breaker status (auxiliary contact) and control switch status the latter indicating if the breaker is in/out of service. This mode is typically used during maintenance. There is no current level check for this stage since this is associated with small currents. Timer 3 is typically set with a longer time. STAGE 3: OUTPUT The outputs from the scheme are:
5-56
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS FlexLogic operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme FlexLogic operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
FlexLogic operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an adjustable period. Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared Illumination of the face plate TRIP LED
BREAKER FAILURE SETTINGS: BF1 INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that initiates three-pole tripping of the breaker. Although this scheme is designed for three-pole tripping, it can be used with single-pole tripping schemes if the hiset and loset current elements are set to be sensitive to the lowest expected fault value but insensitive to the highest expected load on the protected line. BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision pickup level. BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision pickup level. BF1 AMP SUPV OP A through C: This setting selects the B90 Remote Inputs that represent operation of the current supervision elements on phase A, B, or C. BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the Early Path is operational. BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact BKR POS1 to open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the Main Path is operational. BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equipment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In UR relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE diagram shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most applications. In bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
NOTE
BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational. BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as Timer 2, plus an increased safety margin. Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms. BF1 BKR POS1: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact (52/a). This is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. BF1 BKR POS2: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal type auxiliary switch contact (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. BF1 BKR TEST ON: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker In-Service/Out-of-Service switch, set to the Out-of-Service position. BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: This setting represents the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion. Typically this is based on the time while the breaker resistor current can flow through the circuit after the breaker interrupting time. BF1 TRIP DROPOUT TIME DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a Transfer Trip signal on longer than the "reclaim" time.
GE Multilin
5-57
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS BF1 RETRIP TIME DELAY: This setting is used to set a delay before asserting the re-trip operand.
5 SETTINGS
BF1 CT: This setting selects the currents that will be used in Breaker Failure scheme BF1 for current supervision (AMP SUPV, HISET and LOSET elements). BF1 AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current). HiSet and LoSet current supervision will guarantee correct operation. BF1 AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current fault detection level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker-opening resistor is inserted. BF1 AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current fault detection level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted approximately 90% of resistor current).
Figure 532: BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT SUPERVISION LOGIC
5-58
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Figure 533: BREAKER FAILURE LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-59
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS APPLICATION EXAMPLE:
5 SETTINGS
For illustration, assume the F7 current is monitored for Breaker Failure protection of a given breaker as shown below.
Received as DIRECT INPUTs 1 through 9 breaker auxiliary switches (if used for BF)
IED 4
sent as bits no.13, 14 and 15
836759A3.CDR
phase A current, wired to F7
IED 1
phase B current, wired to F7
IED 2
phase C current, wired to F7
IED 3
BKR FAIL SUPV OP BKR FAIL HISET OP BKR FAIL LOSET OP
BF CT = F7
Figure 534: DIRECT I/O SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION The Protection IEDs 1, 2, and 3 (B90 FUNCTION set to "Protection") send the Breaker Fail current supervision flags over the Direct I/O communications. Assume bits 13, 14, and 15 are used for this purpose as follows: For IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" (this is an originating device) DIRECT OUT 13 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 SUPV OP" (this operand drives output number 13) DIRECT OUT 14 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 HISET OP" (this operand drives output number 14) DIRECT OUT 15 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 LOSET OP" (this operand drives output number 15) DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" (this is an originating device) DIRECT OUT 13 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 SUPV OP" (this operand drives output number 13) DIRECT OUT 14 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 HISET OP" (this operand drives output number 14) DIRECT OUT 15 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 LOSET OP" (this operand drives output number 15) DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" (this is an originating device) DIRECT OUT 13 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 SUPV OP" (this operand drives output number 13) DIRECT OUT 14 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 HISET OP" (this operand drives output number 14) DIRECT OUT 15 OPERAND: "BKRSUPV 3 LOSET OP" (this operand drives output number 15)
For IED 2:
For IED 3:
The above 9 flags must be received at the IED 4. Assume Direct Inputs 1 through 9 are to be used for this purpose. This is accomplished with the following settings: For IED 4:
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE: "1" (message received from IED 1) DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER: "13" (this is BKRSUPV 3 SUPV DIRECT INPUT 2 DEVICE: "1" (message received from IED 1) DIRECT INPUT 2 BIT NUMBER: "14" (this is BKRSUPV 3 HISET
OP for Phase A) OP for Phase A) OP for Phase A)
DIRECT INPUT 3 DEVICE: "1" (message received from IED 1) DIRECT INPUT 3 BIT NUMBER: "15" (this is BKRSUPV 3 LOSET DIRECT INPUT 4 DEVICE: "2" (message received from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 4 BIT NUMBER: "13" (this is BKRSUPV 3 SUPV DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE: "2" (message received from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "14" (this is BKRSUPV 3 HISET
OP for Phase B) OP for Phase B) OP for Phase B)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE: "2" (message received from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "15" (this is BKRSUPV 3 LOSET DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE: "3" (message received from IED 3) DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "13" (this is BKRSUPV 3 SUPV
OP for Phase C)
5-60
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE: "3" (message received from IED 3) DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "14" (this is BKRSUPV 3 HISET
OP for Phase C) OP for Phase C)
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE: "3" (message received from IED 3) DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "15" (this is BKRSUPV 3 LOSET
The received flags are now to be configured for in the Breaker Failure 3 logic as follows:
BF 3 AMP SUPV OP A: "Direct Input 1 On" BF 3 AMP SUPV OP B: "Direct Input 4 On" BF 3 AMP SUPV OP C: "Direct Input 7 On" BF 3 AMP HISET OP A: "Direct Input 2 On" BF 3 AMP LOSET OP A: "Direct Input 3 On" BF 3 AMP HISET OP B: "Direct Input 5 On" BF 3 AMP LOSET OP B: "Direct Input 6 On" BF 3 AMP HISET OP C: "Direct Input 8 On" BF 3 AMP LOSET OP C: "Direct Input 9 On"
The B90 current supervision elements reset in less than 0.7 of a power cycle up to the multiple of pickup of 100 (threshold set at 0.01 of the actual fault current) as shown below.
0.70 0.60 Reset Time (cycles) 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 0.00 2 4 10 20 50 100 Multiple of Pickup Average Reset Time Maximum Reset Time
836769A1.CDR
Figure 535: BREAKER FAILURE OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION RESET TIME As the overcurrent supervising flags must be sent via Direct I/Os to the B90 IEDs that perform the BF functionality, an extra delay is introduced. Consequently, the following is recommended for coordinating the BF time: Total BF Reset Time = 0.7 of a power cycle + 0.2 of a power cycle Direct I/O bridge count where:
(EQ 5.1)
0.7 of a power cycle = the reset of the BF overcurrent elements Direct I/O bridge count = the number of "bridges" between the source and destination of the Direct I/O messages (Direct I/O delay)
For example, in the four-IED application example shown earlier, IED 2 is two "bridges" away from IED 4; therefore, the Total BF Reset Time is 0.7 + 2 x 0.2 = 1.1 of a power system cycle. Total BF Reset Time = 0.7 of a power cycle + 0.2 of a power cycle Direct I/O bridge count = 0.7 + 2 0.2 = 1.1 of a power cycle
(EQ 5.2)
Note that a message delivery time of 0.2 of a cycle per "bridge" applies when the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE is set to 128 kbps. The relay uses sophisticated algorithms to speed up the reset time of the breaker failure overcurrent supervision. Caution must be paid when testing the B90 for BF reset times. In particular, the current must be interrupted in a way resembling the actual breaker operation (zero-crossing).
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-61
5 SETTINGS 5.5.5 END FAULT PROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! END FAULT PROTECTION 1(24)
# END FAULT # PROTECTION 1

MESSAGE
EFP1 FUNCTION: Disabled EFP1 CT: F1 EFP1 PICKUP: 1.200 pu EFP1 BREAKER OPEN: Off EFP1 BKR DELAY: 0.400 s EFP1 MANUAL CLOSE: Off EFP1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.040 s EFP1 BLOCK: Off EFP1 TARGET: Self-reset EFP1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The End Fault Protection (EFP) element operates for dead-zone faults; i.e., faults between the CT and an open feeder breaker. Since a bus protection zone terminates on the CTs, faults between the CT and breaker require special consideration. With a bus-side CT (Part A of the figure below), a fault between the open CB and CT is outside the bus zone but can only cleared by tripping the bus zone protection. In this case EFP trips the bus zone protection once the current exceeds a userprogrammable threshold, effectively clearing the fault. With a line-side CT (Part B of the figure below), the zone is reduced once the breaker opens. Otherwise, the bus protection may issue an unnecessary widespread trip in the case of a fault between the open CB and CT. The zone is shortened using the breaker position with a short drop-out delay as a connection status for the associated current. Once the bus zone moves and terminates on the CB, a dead-zone is created between the CB and CT. In this case, the EFP is used; upon operation, the EFP will trip the remote breaker. The EFP element arms when the feeder breaker opens and resets when a manual breaker CLOSE command is issued. To avoid race conditions, a user-programmable time delay for the breaker OPEN signal is provided. Once armed, the element operates when the current exceeds a user-programmable threshold. The output must be configured to either send an intertrip or trip the bus zone protection depending on the CT orientation with respect to the breaker.
a: Bus-side CTs
BUS ZONE
b: Line-side CTs
BUS ZONE
"dead-zone" (requires tripping the bus)
"dead-zone" (requires intertripping)
Figure 536: APPLICATION OF END FAULT PROTECTION ELEMENT
5-62
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
EFP1 PICKUP: Specifies the current level recognized by an armed EFP scheme as fault current in the protected deadzone. Although it can be set very low (above the noise level), set above the maximum load current for extra security. EFP1 BREAKER OPEN: This setting is a FlexLogic operand indicating an open breaker. The operand shall be "On" when the breaker is open. Typically, this setting is a position of an appropriately wired input contact of the B90. EFP1 BKR DELAY: This setting specifies a timed delay between the breaker position being declared as open by the EFP1 BREAKER OPEN setting and the moment the EFP scheme is armed. Set this delay long enough to avoid spurious operation due to a delay between the breaker position and decaying of the breaker current. The current ramp down period of the B90 for the purpose of setting the EFP is 1.3 of a power system cycle. EFP1 MANUAL CLOSE: This setting is a FlexLogic operand indicating a close command for the breaker. This operand shall be "On" when the breaker is ordered to close. Typically this setting is a position of an appropriately wired input contact of the B90. EFP1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting allows extra security when tripping the bus from the EFP element. This timer shall be set longer than the maximum delay between the breaker closing and picking up some current and the EFP MANUAL CLOSE signal. If the manual close signal, EFP MANUAL CLOSE, arrives before the timer expires, the element resets and misoperation due to signal transit times is avoided. EFP1 BLOCK: This setting dynamically block/unblocks the element. A typical application is a by-pass isolator as shown below. When the isolator is closed, the current does not necessarily indicate on a fault between the CB and CT and the element shall be blocked. Therefore, the close status of the isolator shall be used as the block setting.
BUS SECTION
TRANSFER BUS
CB
selective "dead-zone" only if the isolator is open
ISO
Figure 537: END FAULT PROTECTION AND BY-PASS ISOLATORS

SETTING B90 FUNCTION: Logic = 0 Protection = 1
SETTING EFP 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING EFP 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 EFP 1 PICKUP: SETTING EFP 1 CT: Current Magnitude, |I| SETTING EFP 1 MANUAL CLOSE: Off = 0 SETTINGS SETTING EFP 1 BREAKER OPEN: Off = 0 EFP 1 BRK DELAY: tPKP 0 AND | I | > PICKUP SETTING EFP 1 PICKUP DELAY: tPKP 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS EFP 1 OP EFP 1 DPO EFP PKP RUN SETTING AND
836004A1.vsd
Figure 538: END FAULT PROTECTION LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-63
5 SETTINGS 5.5.6 CURRENT ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" CURRENT ELEMENTS
# CURRENT ELEMENTS # # INSTANTANEOUS # OVERCURRENT

MESSAGE
# INSTANTANEOUS # OVERCURRENT 1
MESSAGE
# INSTANTANEOUS # OVERCURRENT 24 # TIME # OVERCURRENT
MESSAGE
# TIME # OVERCURRENT 1
MESSAGE
b) INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTICS The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the TOC (time overcurrent) Current Elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. Table 58: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE IEEE Extremely Inv. IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse GE TYPE IAC IAC Extremely Inv. IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse OTHER I2t Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup. Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays. With this setting, the energy capacity variable is decremented according to the equation provided. Graphs of standard time-current curves on 11 17 log-log graph paper are available upon request from the GE Multilin literature department. The original files are also available in PDF format on the UR Software Installation CD and the GE Multilin Web Page at www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
NOTE
5-64
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae: A tr --------------------------------- + B ---------------------------------I T = TDM --------------- p 1 , T RESET = TDM I - 2 --------------- 1 I pickup I pickup where: T = Operate Time (seconds) TDM = Multiplier Setting I = Input Current Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting A, B, p = Constants TRESET = reset time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed) tr = characteristic constant
(EQ 5.3)
Table 59: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE IEEE VERY INVERSE IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE A 28.2 19.61 0.0515 B 0.1217 0.491 0.1140 P 2.0000 2.0000 0.02000 TR 29.1 21.6 4.85
Table 510: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER (TDM) CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 11.341 22.682 45.363 90.727 136.090 181.454 226.817 8.090 16.179 32.358 64.716 97.074 129.432 161.790 3.220 6.439 12.878 25.756 38.634 51.512 64.390 2.0 4.761 9.522 19.043 38.087 57.130 76.174 95.217 3.514 7.028 14.055 28.111 42.166 56.221 70.277 1.902 3.803 7.606 15.213 22.819 30.426 38.032 3.0 1.823 3.647 7.293 14.587 21.880 29.174 36.467 1.471 2.942 5.885 11.769 17.654 23.538 29.423 1.216 2.432 4.864 9.729 14.593 19.458 24.322 4.0 1.001 2.002 4.003 8.007 12.010 16.014 20.017 0.899 1.798 3.597 7.193 10.790 14.387 17.983 0.973 1.946 3.892 7.783 11.675 15.567 19.458 5.0 0.648 1.297 2.593 5.187 7.780 10.374 12.967 0.654 1.308 2.616 5.232 7.849 10.465 13.081 0.844 1.688 3.377 6.753 10.130 13.507 16.883 6.0 0.464 0.927 1.855 3.710 5.564 7.419 9.274 0.526 1.051 2.103 4.205 6.308 8.410 10.513 0.763 1.526 3.051 6.102 9.153 12.204 15.255 7.0 0.355 0.709 1.418 2.837 4.255 5.674 7.092 0.450 0.900 1.799 3.598 5.397 7.196 8.995 0.706 1.412 2.823 5.647 8.470 11.294 14.117 8.0 0.285 0.569 1.139 2.277 3.416 4.555 5.693 0.401 0.802 1.605 3.209 4.814 6.418 8.023 0.663 1.327 2.653 5.307 7.960 10.614 13.267 9.0 0.237 0.474 0.948 1.897 2.845 3.794 4.742 0.368 0.736 1.472 2.945 4.417 5.889 7.361 0.630 1.260 2.521 5.041 7.562 10.083 12.604 10.0 0.203 0.407 0.813 1.626 2.439 3.252 4.065 0.345 0.689 1.378 2.756 4.134 5.513 6.891 0.603 1.207 2.414 4.827 7.241 9.654 12.068
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
IEEE VERY INVERSE
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
GE Multilin
5-65
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS IEC CURVES
5 SETTINGS
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr -----------------------------------------------------------------I T = TDM --------------- E 1 , T RESET = TDM I 2 --------------- 1 I pickup I pickup
(EQ 5.4)
where:
T = Operate Time (seconds) TDM = Multiplier Setting I = Input Current K, E = Constants tr = Characteristic Constant Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 511: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE IEC CURVE A (BS142) IEC CURVE B (BS142) IEC CURVE C (BS142) IEC SHORT INVERSE K 0.140 13.500 80.000 0.050 E 0.020 1.000 2.000 0.040 TR 9.7 43.2 58.2 0.500
Table 512: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER (TDM) 1.5 2.0 0.501 1.003 2.006 4.012 6.017 8.023 10.029 0.675 1.350 2.700 5.400 8.100 10.800 13.500 1.333 2.667 5.333 10.667 16.000 21.333 26.667 0.089 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.067 1.423 1.778 3.0 0.315 0.630 1.260 2.521 3.781 5.042 6.302 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.700 4.050 5.400 6.750 0.500 1.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 0.056 0.111 0.223 0.445 0.668 0.890 1.113 4.0 0.249 0.498 0.996 1.992 2.988 3.984 4.980 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.800 2.700 3.600 4.500 0.267 0.533 1.067 2.133 3.200 4.267 5.333 0.044 0.088 0.175 0.351 0.526 0.702 0.877 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 5.0 6.0 0.214 0.428 0.856 1.712 2.568 3.424 4.280 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.025 2.700 3.375 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.333 2.000 2.667 3.333 0.038 0.075 0.150 0.301 0.451 0.602 0.752 0.192 0.384 0.767 1.535 2.302 3.070 3.837 0.135 0.270 0.540 1.080 1.620 2.160 2.700 0.114 0.229 0.457 0.914 1.371 1.829 2.286 0.034 0.067 0.135 0.269 0.404 0.538 0.673 7.0 0.176 0.353 0.706 1.411 2.117 2.822 3.528 0.113 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.350 1.800 2.250 0.083 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.000 1.333 1.667 0.031 0.062 0.124 0.247 0.371 0.494 0.618 8.0 0.165 0.330 0.659 1.319 1.978 2.637 3.297 0.096 0.193 0.386 0.771 1.157 1.543 1.929 0.063 0.127 0.254 0.508 0.762 1.016 1.270 0.029 0.058 0.115 0.231 0.346 0.461 0.576 9.0 0.156 0.312 0.623 1.247 1.870 2.493 3.116 0.084 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.013 1.350 1.688 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 1.000 0.027 0.054 0.109 0.218 0.327 0.435 0.544 10.0 0.149 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.782 2.376 2.971 0.075 0.150 0.300 0.600 0.900 1.200 1.500 0.040 0.081 0.162 0.323 0.485 0.646 0.808 0.026 0.052 0.104 0.207 0.311 0.415 0.518
IEC CURVE A 0.05 0.860 0.10 1.719 0.20 3.439 0.40 6.878 0.60 10.317 0.80 13.755 1.00 17.194 IEC CURVE B 0.05 1.350 0.10 2.700 0.20 5.400 0.40 10.800 0.60 16.200 0.80 21.600 1.00 27.000 IEC CURVE C 0.05 3.200 0.10 6.400 0.20 12.800 0.40 25.600 0.60 38.400 0.80 51.200 1.00 64.000 IEC SHORT TIME 0.05 0.153 0.10 0.306 0.20 0.612 0.40 1.223 0.60 1.835 0.80 2.446 1.00 3.058
5-66
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS IAC CURVES: The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
D E B tr A + -------------------------------- + ----------------------------------- + ---------------------------------2 I I I T = TDM --------------- C --------------- C --------------- C 3 , T RESET = TDM --------------------------------I --------------- 2 1 I pickup I I pickup pickup I pickup where: T = Operate Time (sec.) TDM = Multiplier Setting I = Input Current Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting A to E = Constants tr = Characteristic Constant TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
(EQ 5.5)
Table 513: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE IAC EXTREME INVERSE IAC VERY INVERSE IAC INVERSE IAC SHORT INVERSE A 0.0040 0.0900 0.2078 0.0428 B 0.6379 0.7955 0.8630 0.0609 C 0.6200 0.1000 0.8000 0.6200 D 1.7872 1.2885 0.4180 0.0010 E 0.2461 7.9586 0.1947 0.0221 TR 6.008 4.678 0.990 0.222
Table 514: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER (TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 1.699 3.398 6.796 13.591 20.387 27.183 33.979 1.451 2.901 5.802 11.605 17.407 23.209 29.012 0.578 1.155 2.310 4.621 6.931 9.242 11.552 0.072 0.143 0.286 0.573 0.859 1.145 1.431 2.0 0.749 1.498 2.997 5.993 8.990 11.987 14.983 0.656 1.312 2.624 5.248 7.872 10.497 13.121 0.375 0.749 1.499 2.997 4.496 5.995 7.494 0.047 0.095 0.190 0.379 0.569 0.759 0.948 3.0 0.303 0.606 1.212 2.423 3.635 4.846 6.058 0.269 0.537 1.075 2.150 3.225 4.299 5.374 0.266 0.532 1.064 2.128 3.192 4.256 5.320 0.035 0.070 0.140 0.279 0.419 0.559 0.699 4.0 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.422 2.133 2.844 3.555 0.172 0.343 0.687 1.374 2.061 2.747 3.434 0.221 0.443 0.885 1.770 2.656 3.541 4.426 0.031 0.061 0.123 0.245 0.368 0.490 0.613 5.0 0.123 0.246 0.491 0.983 1.474 1.966 2.457 0.133 0.266 0.533 1.065 1.598 2.131 2.663 0.196 0.392 0.784 1.569 2.353 3.138 3.922 0.028 0.057 0.114 0.228 0.341 0.455 0.569 6.0 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.744 1.115 1.487 1.859 0.113 0.227 0.453 0.906 1.359 1.813 2.266 0.180 0.360 0.719 1.439 2.158 2.878 3.597 0.027 0.054 0.108 0.217 0.325 0.434 0.542 7.0 0.074 0.149 0.298 0.595 0.893 1.191 1.488 0.101 0.202 0.405 0.810 1.215 1.620 2.025 0.168 0.337 0.674 1.348 2.022 2.695 3.369 0.026 0.052 0.105 0.210 0.314 0.419 0.524 8.0 0.062 0.124 0.248 0.495 0.743 0.991 1.239 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.745 1.117 1.490 1.862 0.160 0.320 0.640 1.280 1.921 2.561 3.201 0.026 0.051 0.102 0.204 0.307 0.409 0.511 9.0 0.053 0.106 0.212 0.424 0.636 0.848 1.060 0.087 0.174 0.349 0.698 1.046 1.395 1.744 0.154 0.307 0.614 1.229 1.843 2.457 3.072 0.025 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.301 0.401 0.501 10.0 0.046 0.093 0.185 0.370 0.556 0.741 0.926 0.083 0.165 0.331 0.662 0.992 1.323 1.654 0.148 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.781 2.375 2.969 0.025 0.049 0.099 0.197 0.296 0.394 0.493
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 IAC INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
IAC VERY INVERSE
IAC SHORT INVERSE
GE Multilin
5-67
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS I2t CURVES: The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae: 100 100 T = TDM ------------------------ , T RESET = TDM -------------------------I - 2 I -------------- --------------- 2 I pickup I pickup where:
5 SETTINGS
(EQ 5.6)
T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting; TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 515: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER (TDM) 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 0.44 4.44 44.44 444.44 4444.4 26666.7 2.0 0.25 2.50 25.00 250.00 2500.0 15000.0 3.0 0.11 1.11 11.11 111.11 1111.1 6666.7 4.0 0.06 0.63 6.25 62.50 625.00 3750.0 5.0 0.04 0.40 4.00 40.00 400.00 2400.0 6.0 0.03 0.28 2.78 27.78 277.78 1666.7 7.0 0.02 0.20 2.04 20.41 204.08 1224.5 8.0 0.02 0.16 1.56 15.63 156.25 937.50 9.0 0.01 0.12 1.23 12.35 123.46 740.74 10.0 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup T RESET = TDM in seconds where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier Setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
(EQ 5.7) (EQ 5.8)
5-68
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50)
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" CURRENT ELEMENTS ! INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
# INSTANTANEOUS # OVERCURRENT 1
MESSAGE
IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled IOC1 CT: F1 IOC1 PICKUP: 1.200 pu IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.000 s IOC1 BLOCK: Off IOC1 TARGET: Self-Reset IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Instantaneous Overcurrent element is used primarily for supervising main protection trip commands on a per-breaker basis (i.e. Differential, Breaker Failure, and End Fault Protection). It responds to a single-phase current. If the intention is to allow three-phase tripping if any phase current is above the threshold, the appropriate FlexLogic operands are passed between the IEDs using the B90 fiber optic communications (Direct I/Os). Instantaneous Overcurrent supervision can also be used to prevent tripping feeders with low currents or for definite time backup protection. The pickup setting is specified in per unit values. The nominal current as entered under SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS ! CURis 1 p.u. The element can be effectively enabled only when B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". One IOC element is available per each CT input of the relay.
RENT BANK XY ! CT XY SECONDARY
SETTING IOC 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING IOC 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 IOC 1 PICKUP: SETTING IOC 1 CT: Current Magnitude, |I| | I | > PICKUP tRST RUN IOC 1 RESET DELAY: tPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS IOC 1 OP IOC 1 DPO IOC 1 PKP SETTING AND
SETTINGS IOC 1 PICKUP DELAY:
Figure 539: INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-69
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51)
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" CURRENT ELEMENTS !" TIME OVERCURRENT
MESSAGE
TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled TOC1 CT: F1 TOC1 PICKUP: 1.200 pu TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00 TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous TOC1 BLOCK: Off TOC1 TARGET: Self-Reset TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
Range: 0.000 to 600.00 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Time Overcurrent (TOC) element is provided for backup protection with a choice of inverse time curves. The element is enabled only when PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". One TOC element is available per each CT input.
SETTING TOC 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 AND Enabled = 1 SETTING TOC 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 TOC 1 RESET: SETTING TOC 1 CT: Current Magnitude, |I| RUN |I| > PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS TOC 1 PKP TOC 1 DPO TOC 1 OP TOC 1 PICKUP: TOC 1 CURVE: TOC 1 TD MULTIPLIER: SETTINGS
Figure 540: TIME OVERCURRENT SCHEME LOGIC
5-70
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
# VOLTAGE # ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
# UNDERVOLTAGE 1 # # UNDERVOLTAGE 2 # ELEMENTS

MESSAGE
# UNDERVOLTAGE 12 #
b) UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ! UNDERVOLTAGE 1(12)
# UNDERVOLTAGE 1 #
MESSAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNDERVOLTAGE 1 VT: F5 UNDERVOLTAGE 1 PICKUP: 0.800 pu UNDERVOLTAGE 1 MIN VOLTAGE: 0.000 pu UNDERVOLTAGE 1 PKP DELAY: 0.000 s UNDERVOLTAGE 1 RST DELAY: 0.000 s UNDERVOLTAGE 1 BLK: Off UNDERVOLTAGE 1 TARGET: Self-Reset UNDERVOLTAGE 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Available voltage channels
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Undervoltage element supervises (low-voltage check) current based main protection (i.e. Differential, Breaker Failure, End Fault, and Time Overcurrent backup protection). The B90 accepts phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage input configurations. If the intention is to operate all three phases for any one phase voltage collapse, appropriate FlexLogic operand exchanges must occur between the B90s using fiber optic communications (Direct I/Os). The Undervoltage element also accepts the neutral voltage (3V0) from an open-corner delta VT arrangement. In this case, the FlexLogic output is inverted to accomplish the 3V0 overvoltage functionality. Application of the Undervoltage element is beneficial during CT trouble conditions. A Low-voltage check prevents maloperation of the main protection until the CT Trouble element (differential current alarm) operates. The CT Trouble element is user-configurable to block selected protection functions indefinitely. Voltage supervision alone does not guarantee security because a CT trouble may be followed by an external fault causing a low-voltage condition. Voltage pickup is set in per-unit values. The nominal voltage as entered in the SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE !" VT xy SECONDARY setting corresponds to 1 pu. The minimum voltage setting (UNDERVOLTAGE n MIN VOLTAGE) specifies the minimum voltage required for element operation. This setting discriminates between undervoltage conditions for energized and de-energized circuits. If the element is used for low-voltage supervision, set this value to zero.
BANK xy
GE Multilin
5-71
5 SETTINGS
The Undervoltage element is enabled only when PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". One element is available per each voltage input of the relay.
SETTING B90 FUNCTION: Logic = 0 Protection = 1 SETTING UNDERVOLTAGE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING UNDERVOLTAGE 1 BLK: Off = 0 AND
SETTINGS UNDERVOLTAGE 1 MIN VOLTAGE: UNDERVOLTAGE 1 PICKUP:
SETTING UNDERVOLTAGE 1 PKP DELAY: UNDERVOLTAGE 1 RST DELAY: tPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS UNDERVOLTAGE 1 OP tRST UNDERVOLTAGE 1 DPO UNDERVOLTAGE 1 PKP
SETTING UNDERVOLTAGE 1 VT: Voltage Magnitude, |V|
RUN | V | > MIN VOLTAGE & |V| < PICKUP
Figure 541: UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
5-72
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
CONTROL elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS section at the front of this chapter for further information. 5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTINGS GROUPS
# SETTING GROUPS #
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Disabled SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Off SETTING GROUP EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELEsettings menu. The faceplate Settings in Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized LED) is in service.
MENTS
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to "On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the breaker being open. Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time the highest-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups. There is no "activate on" setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is active. The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications (e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the ON state of a particular settings group.
Figure 542: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP
GE Multilin
5-73
5 SETTINGS 5.6.3 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL ELEMENTS
# DIGITAL ELEMENTS # # DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 #

MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Dig Element 1 DIG ELEM Off DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM Off 1 INPUT: 1 PICKUP 0.000 s 1 RESET 0.000 s 1 BLOCK:
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled # DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 #
MESSAGE
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 16 # There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the Digital Element. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0". DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to "0".
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 INPUT: Off = 0 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 NAME: RUN INPUT = 1
SETTINGS DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 PICKUP DELAY: DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIG ELEM 01 DPO DIG ELEM 01 PKP DIG ELEM 01 OP
827042A1.VSD
Figure 543: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC
5-74
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS a) CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts. The Voltage Monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A). As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the FlexLogic operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic operand "Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted. b) BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING EXAMPLE 1 In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the breaker position.
DC+ UR Relay - Form-A H1a
I = Current Monitor
I H1b V
V = Voltage Monitor
H1c 52a
Trip Coil
827073A1.vsd
DC
Figure 544: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1 Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g. "Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. "Cont Ip 1" and will be set "ON" when the breaker is closed. Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be: # DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 #
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Bkr Trip Cct Out DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Cont Op 1 VOff DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: 1 PICKUP 0.200 s 1 RESET 0.100 s
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Cont Ip 1 Off
GE Multilin
5-75
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT EVENTS: Enabled 1
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
NOTE: The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms. c) BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING EXAMPLE 2 If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in Figure: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 2). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (as listed in the VALUES OF RESISTOR R table) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position - the BLOCK setting is selected to Off. In this case, the settings will be: # DIGITAL ELEMENT # 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Bkr Trip Cct Out DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Cont Op 1 VOff DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM Off 1 PICKUP 0.200 s 1 RESET 0.100 s 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT EVENTS: Enabled 1
MESSAGE
DC+ UR Relay - Form-A H1a

I = Current Monitor
Table 516: VALUES OF RESISTOR R

POWER SUPPLY (V DC) 24 30 48 RESISTANCE (OHMS) 1000 5000 10000 25000 25000 50000 POWER (WATTS) 2 2 2 5 5 5
I H1b V
V = Voltage Monitor
H1c 52a
R
By-pass Resistor
110 125 250
Trip Coil
827074A1.vsd
DC
Figure 545: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2
5-76
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.4 MONITORING ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS
# MONITORING # ELEMENTS # CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 # # CT TROUBLE ZONE 2 # # CT TROUBLE ZONE 3 # # CT TROUBLE ZONE 4 # # BUS REPLICA #
MESSAGE
# ISOLATOR 1 # # ISOLATOR 2 #
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
# ISOLATOR 48 #
A CT Trouble monitoring element is provided for each zone of differential protection. The element is a definite time overcurrent function responding to the differential current of the zone. As such the element is not meant to be faster than the bus differential protection in order to prevent misoperation of the latter during CT trouble conditions. The CT trouble element is meant to set an alarm and block the differential zone if the user selects so. Other means, such as undervoltage supervision or a check-zone, shall be used to ride through race conditions between the differential protection and the CT Trouble function. See the APPLICATION OF SETTINGS chapter for more details. The number of available zones and their size (maximum number of inputs) are optional and controlled by the software portion of the B90 order code. Please refer to the ordering section for detailed information on the maximum number of zones and inputs for a given B90 model.
GE Multilin
5-77
5 SETTINGS 5.6.5 CT TROUBLE
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS ! CT TROUBLE ZONE 1(4)
# CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 #
MESSAGE
CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 PICKUP: 0.100 pu CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 DELAY: 1.0 s CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 TARGET: Self-reset CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range:
Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The CT Trouble feature is available only when PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION is set to "Protection". This element uses the differential current calculated in accordance with the bus configuration programmed under BUS ZONE 1. Operation of this element is therefore completely dependent on the dynamic bus replica, which must be defined first. The bus differential zones are defined using the path SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BUS. The CT Trouble element 1 detects CT problems in any of the circuits actually connected to the differential zone defined as BUS ZONE 1. The CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 PICKUP setting specifies the differential current level that defines an abnormal bus state. If the differential current in a given phase remains above this level for the time interval defined by the CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 DELAY setting, CT Trouble is declared for the given phase by setting the appropriate FlexLogic output operand. The operand may be configured to raise an alarm and block the bus differential function for the corresponding zone of protection.
SETTING B90 FUNCTION: Logic = 0 Protection = 1 SETTING CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING BUS 1A CT: Current Phasor SETTINGS BUS 1A STATUS: Off = 0 ZONE 1 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT BUS 1A DIRECTION: SETTINGS CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 PICKUP: RUN ID1 Id1 > PICKUP SETTINGS CT TROUBLE ZONE 1 PICKUP: tPKP 0 AND
...
SETTING BUS 1X CT: Current Phasor SETTINGS BUS 1X STATUS: Off = 0 BUS 1X DIRECTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND CT TROUBLE1 OP
836759A3.CDR
Figure 546: CT TROUBLE SCHEME LOGIC
5-78
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.6 ISOLATOR MONITORING
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS !" BUS REPLICA ! ISOLATOR 1(48)
# ISOLATOR 1 #
MESSAGE
ISOLATOR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled ISOLATOR 1 OPEN: Off ISOLATOR 1 CLOSED: Off ISOLATOR 1 ALARM DELAY: 0.05 s ISOLATOR 1 RESET: Off ISOLATOR 1 TARGET: Self-Reset ISOLATOR 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range:
0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range:
Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Bus protection zone discrimination depends heavily on reliable isolator position feedback. Therefore, two isolator auxiliary contacts normally open and normally closed must confirm the status of the isolator via the B90 contact inputs. This element responds to both normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts of an isolator or a tie-breaker in order to assert the actual position of the isolator for the dynamic bus image. The element asserts two extra output operands indicating "isolator alarm" (auxiliary contact discrepancy), and "block switching operations in the substation". The operation of the element is summarized in the following table. Table 517: ISOLATOR MONITORING LOGIC
ISOLATOR OPEN AUXILIARY CONTACT Off Off On On ISOLATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY CONTACT On Off On Off ISOLATOR POSITION CLOSED LAST VALID CLOSED OPEN ALARM No After time delay until acknowledged No BLOCK SWITCHING No Until Isolator Position is valid No
The position of an isolator is indicated by the ISOLATOR N POSITION FlexLogic operand (On = Closed, Off = Open). This operand is used as a circuit connection status for the bus configuration. When "On", the related current is associated with a given differential zone; when "Off", the current is excluded from differential calculations. An isolator alarm FlexLogic operand, ISOLATOR 1 ALARM, is asserted after a settable time delay if the auxiliary contacts of the isolator do not match (open-open, closed-closed instead of open-closed or closed-open), yielding an undefined isolator position. The operand may be used to block user-selected protection functions and may be reset manually or remotely via the resetting input operand. The ISOLATOR 1 BLOCK operand is asserted as long as the isolator position is invalid. This operand may be used to block switching operations in the substation. Typically, breakers and isolators that control currents flowing through a given isolator shall be blocked from operation as long as isolator position is not resolved. The element is effectively enabled only when PRODUCT SETUP ! B90 FUNCTION ! B90 FUNCTION is set to "Logic". Refer to the APPLICATION OF SETTINGS chapter for more details on the usage of the Bus Replica element. SETTINGS: ISOLATOR 1 OPEN: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand that represents an auxiliary contact of the monitored isolator. Typically this setting is a status of an appropriately wired input contact ("On" = isolator open).
GE Multilin
5-79
5 SETTINGS
ISOLATOR 1 CLOSED: This setting indicates a FlexLogic operand that represents an auxiliary contact of the monitored isolator. Typically this setting is a status of an appropriately wired input contact ("On" = isolator closed).
+
ISOLATOR 1
ISOLATOR 1 OPEN setting = Contact Input 7a On B90 F7a F7c F7b FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Contact Input F7a On Contact Input F7c On
ISOLATOR 1 CLOSED setting = Contact Input 7c On

836743A1.vsd
Figure 547: TYPICAL ISOLATOR OPEN / CLOSED SETTINGS ISOLATOR 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay after which an isolator alarm is issued by asserting the operand assigned to ISOLATOR 1 ALARM. The delay shall be longer than the slowest operation (transition) time of the isolator. ISOLATOR 1 RESET: This setting indicates a FlexLogic operand that acknowledges the isolator alarm. Once the alarm is acknowledged, the ISOLATOR 1 ALARM is reset. If the latter operand was configured to block protection, the blocking is removed once the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledge pulse must last at least 50 ms to take effect.
SETTING B90 FUNCTION: Logic = 0 Protection = 1 SETTING ISOLATOR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTINGS ISOLATOR 1 OPEN: Off = 0 ISOLATOR 1 CLOSED: Off = 0 RUN Isolator Position Logic FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ISOLATOR 1 POSITION
AND
SETTING ISOLATOR 1 ALARM DELAY: AND tPKP 0 Positive Edge Detector FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ISOLATOR 1 BLOCK
XOR
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ISOLATOR 1 ALARM
SETTING ISOLATOR 1 RESET: Off = 0 OR R
836002A1.vsd
Figure 548: ISOLATOR MONITORING LOGIC
5-80
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Isolator position valid (isolator opened) ISOLATOR 1 OPEN
Isolator position invalid
Isolator position valid (isolator opened)
ISOLATOR 1 CLOSED
ISOLATOR 1 POSITION
ISOLATOR 1 BLOCK
alarm time delay
blocking signal resets when isolator position valid alarm acknowledged
ISOLATOR 1 ALARM
ISOLATOR 1 RESET
alarm acknowledging signal

836744A1.vsd
Figure 549: ISOLATOR MONITORING SAMPLE TIMING DIAGRAM
GE Multilin
5-81
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7INPUTS / OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS ! CONTACT INPUTS
5 SETTINGS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS # # CONTACT INPUT H5a #

MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Cont Ip 1 CONTACT INPUT H5a DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
# CONTACT INPUT xxx # # CONTACT INPUT # THRESHOLDS
MESSAGE
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs. An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The "Contact Ip X On" (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input "X" being closed, while "Contact Input X Off" corresponds to contact input "X" being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is set to "Enabled", every change in the contact input state will trigger an event. A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the B90 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no.1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting. A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram). Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
5-82
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is below 1msec. For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1 ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time. Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change. The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
INPUT VOLTAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
2
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record
1
At this time, the new (HIGH) contact state is validated
3
The FlexLogic operand is going to be asserted at this protection pass
TM
6
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record
5
At this time, the new (LOW) contact state is validated
5
7
RAW CONTACT STATE
DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand is going to be de-asserted at this protection pass
4
FLEXLOGICTM OPERAND
SCAN TIME (0.5 msec)
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state
DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state
PROTECTION PASS (8 times a cycle controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 550: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This value should be selected according to the following criteria: 16 for 24 V sources, 30 for 48 V sources, 80 for 110 to 125 V sources and 140 for 250 V sources. For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
(52b)"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
GE Multilin
5-83
5 SETTINGS 5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS !
# VIRTUAL INPUT #
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled VIRTUAL INPUT Virt Ip 1 VIRTUAL INPUT TYPE: Latched 1 ID: 1
MESSAGE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
# VIRTUAL INPUT #
As above for Virtual Input 1
# VIRTUAL INPUT # # UCA SBO TIMER #
32
As above for Virtual Input 1
UCA SBO TIMEOUT: 30 s
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (COMMANDS menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input signal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss. If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to "Disabled", the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set to "Enabled", the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in response to received input signals and the applied settings. There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is "Self-Reset", when the input signal transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to OFF = 0. If set to "Latched", the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0. The "Self-Reset" operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
NOTE
The Select-Before-Operate timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic de-selection of the virtual input, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely (used only with the UCA Select-Before-Operate feature).
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 Enabled=1
AND
S Latch SETTING R
AND OR
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1 Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
SETTING VIRTUAL INPUT 1 TYPE: Latched Self - Reset
(Flexlogic Operand) Virt Ip 1
AND
827080A2.CDR
Figure 551: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
5-84
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS ! CONTACT OUTPUT H1
# CONTACT OUTPUT H1 #
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Off CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs. An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so. EXAMPLE: The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE in the DIGITAL ELEMENTS section). The monitor will set a flag (see the Specifications for FormA). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the flag; e.g. Cont Op 1 IOn or Cont Op 1 IOff. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in". This can be realized in the UR using the Cont Op 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the Contact Output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: "Cont Op 1" OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: "Cont Op 1 IOn" CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: "Enabled"
operand
5.7.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ! VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
# VIRTUAL OUTPUT #
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Virt Op 1
1 ID
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so. For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip" VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
GE Multilin
5-85
5 SETTINGS 5.7.5 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institutes (EPRI) UCA2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) specifications. The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet communications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9C and 9D versions of the CPU module.
NOTE
The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic to allow distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those messages that have originated in selected devices. GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs. The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not occurred. The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message hold time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the hold time interval, and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest possible rate, as set by its default update timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is received from a remote device before the hold time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating, can be displayed. The GOOSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs. b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GOOSE MESSAGES In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION !" RELAY NAME setting. c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GOOSE MESSAGES
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE DEVICES ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
# REMOTE DEVICE #
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Remote Device 1
Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
5-86
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE INPUTS ! REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
# REMOTE INPUT 1 #
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Remote Device 1 REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR: None REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off REMOTE IN 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 1 to 16 inclusive
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. The relay provides 32 Remote Inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifications and is presented in the UCA2 DNA ASSIGNMENTS table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate operand. Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above. selects the number (1 to 16) of the Remote Device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see REMOTE DEVICES section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR selects the specific bits of the GOOSE message required. REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW in the REMOTE DEVICES section.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-87
5 SETTINGS 5.7.7 REMOTE OUTPUTS: DNA BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
# REMOTE OUTPUTS # DNA- 1 BIT PAIR

MESSAGE
DNA- 1 OPERAND: Off DNA- 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted. Table 518: UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS
DNA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DEFINITION OperDev Lock Out Initiate Reclosing Block Reclosing Breaker Failure Initiate Send Transfer Trip Receive Transfer Trip Send Perm Receive Perm Stop Perm Send Block Receive Block Stop Block BkrDS BkrPhsADS BkrPhsBDS BkrPhsCDS DiscSwDS Interlock DS LineEndOpen Status Event Fault Present Sustained Arc Downed Conductor Sync Closing Mode Reserved Report mode status of local GOOSE device Report sustained arc Report downed conductor Report line open at local end Report operating status of local GOOSE device Initiate remote reclose sequence Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence Initiate remote breaker failure scheme Initiate remote trip operation Report receipt of remote transfer trip command Report permissive affirmative Report receipt of permissive affirmative Override permissive affirmative Report block affirmative Report receipt of block affirmative Override block affirmative Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Report breaker disconnect phase A state Report breaker disconnect phase B state Report breaker disconnect phase C state INTENDED FUNCTION LOGIC 0 Trip LockoutOff InitRecloseOff BlockOff BFIOff TxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOff TxPermOff RxPermOff StopPermOff TxBlockOff RxBlockOff StopBlockOff Open Open Open Open Open DSLockOff Open Offline EventOff FaultOff SustArcOff DownedOff SyncClsOff Normal LOGIC 1 Close LockoutOn InitRecloseOn BlockOn BFIOn TxXfrTripOn RxXfrTripOn TxPermOn RxPermOn StopPermOn TxBlockOn RxBlockOn StopBlockOn Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed DSLockOn Closed Available EventOn FaultOn SustArcOn DownedOn SyncClsOn Test
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2832
NOTE
5-88
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS: USERST BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
# REMOTE OUTPUTS # UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR

MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Off UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted. The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" UCA/MMS PROTOCOL settings menu. DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s
NOTE
5.7.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING
# RESETTING #
RESET OPERAND: Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate RESET button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any programmed operand. When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the FlexLogic operand "RESET OP". Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
GE Multilin
5-89
5 SETTINGS 5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT INPUTS ! DIRECT INPUT 1(96)
# DIRECT INPUT 1 #
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER: 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off DIRECT INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 1 to 8
Range: 1 to 96
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This group of settings specifies how the Direct Input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of this Direct Input. The specified Direct Input is driven by the device identified here. The DIRECT INPUT BIT NUMBER is the bit number from which to extract the state for this Direct Input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit identified here as DIRECT INPUT BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the Direct Output Number of the sending device. The DIRECT INPUT DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the Direct Input when the associated Direct Device is offline. b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT OUTPUTS ! DIRECT OUTPUT 1(96)
# DIRECT OUTPUT 1 #
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND: Off DIRECT OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this Direct Output. c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES The examples introduced in the PRODUCT SETUP section for Direct I/Os are continued below to illustrate usage of the Direct Inputs and Outputs. EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING I/O CAPABILITIES OF A B90 RELAY Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 552: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5 and bit number 12 are used, as an example): UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = "12"
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND
= "Cont Ip 1 On"
The "Cont Ip 1 On" operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as "DIRECT INPUT 5 ON".
5-90
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1
BLOCK
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 553: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase IOC1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay. The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals): UR IED 2: UR IED 3: UR IED 4: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND:
"PHASE IOC1 OP" "PHASE IOC1 OP" "PHASE IOC1 OP"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4" DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as "DIRECT INPUT 7 ON", "DIRECT INPUT 8 ON", and "DIRECT INPUT 9 ON". Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to "ON"), or to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to "OFF"). EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 554: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION
GE Multilin
5-91
5 SETTINGS
Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 TX1
UR IED 2
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 555: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a "bridge". The following settings should be applied: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6"
IED 3)
UR IED 3:
5
UR IED 2:
IED 1)
(forward a message from 1 to 3) (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 2
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1

842717A1.CDR
Figure 556: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT I/O EXAMPLE 3 In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1 setting).
5-92
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.8TESTING
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE
5.8 TESTING 5.8.1 TEST MODE
## SETTINGS ## TESTING
TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled
The relay provides test settings to verify that the relay is functional using simulated conditions to test all contact inputs and outputs. While the relay is in Test Mode (TEST MODE FUNCTION: "Enabled"), the feature being tested overrides normal functioning of the relay. During this time the Test Mode LED will remain on. Once out of Test Mode (TEST MODE FUNCTION: "Disabled"), the normal functioning of the relay will be restored. 5.8.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT # INPUTS

MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip 1 : Disabled FORCE Cont Ip 2 : Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip xx : Disabled
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test Mode LED will be ON indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled. 5.8.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT # OUTPUTS

MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op 1: Disabled FORCE Cont Op 2: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
FORCE Cont Op xx: Disabled
The Force Contact Output feature provides a method of performing checks on all contact outputs. Once enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal contact outputs functions. The TEST MODE LED will be ON. The state of each contact output may be programmed as Disabled, Energized, De-energized, or Freeze. The Freeze option maintains the output contact in the state at which it was frozen. All contact output operations return to normal when all the settings for this feature are disabled.
GE Multilin
5-93
5.8 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5-94
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
# CONTACT INPUTS # # VIRTUAL INPUTS # # REMOTE INPUTS # # CONTACT OUTPUTS # # VIRTUAL OUTPUTS # # REMOTE DEVICES # STATUS # REMOTE DEVICES # STATISTICS # FLEX STATES # # ETHERNET # # DIRECT INPUTS # # DIRECT DEVICES # STATUS
See page 6-2. See page 6-2. See page 6-2. See page 6-3. See page 6-3. See page 6-3. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-5. See page 6-5.
6
## ACTUAL VALUES ## METERING # BUS # # CURRENTS # # VOLTAGES # # FREQUENCY # See page 6-7. See page 6-7. See page 6-7. See page 6-7.
## ACTUAL VALUES ## RECORDS
# EVENT RECORDS # # OSCILLOGRAPHY #
See page 6-8. See page 6-8.
## ACTUAL VALUES ## PRODUCT INFO
# MODEL INFORMATION # # FIRMWARE REVISIONS #
See page 6-9. See page 6-9.
GE Multilin
6-1
6.2 STATUS 6.2STATUS For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS ! CONTACT INPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS #
Cont Ip 1 Off

MESSAGE
Cont Ip xx Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input. 6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS
# VIRTUAL INPUTS #
Virt Ip 1 Off

MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32 Off
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input. 6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE INPUTS
# REMOTE INPUTS #
REMOTE INPUT STATUS: Off

MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT 32 STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here. The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be "Offline" in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
6-2
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS 6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS
# CONTACT OUTPUTS #
Cont Op 1 Off
MESSAGE
Cont Op xx Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output. For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On, VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS #
Virt Op 1 Off
MESSAGE
Virt Op 64 Off
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output. 6.2.6 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
# REMOTE DEVICES # STATUS

MESSAGE
All REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE: No REMOTE DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
Range: Online, Offline
REMOTE DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required Remote Device is not online.
GE Multilin
6-3
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
# REMOTE DEVICE #
REMOTE DEVICE StNum: REMOTE DEVICE SqNum:
1 0 1 0
MESSAGE
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a GOOSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented. 6.2.8 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" FLEX STATES
# FLEX STATES #
PARAM Off
1: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off Off
Range: Off, On
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit. 6.2.9 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" ETHERNET
# ETHERNET #
MESSAGE
ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS: OK ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
Range: Fail, OK
6-4
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS 6.2.10 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS
# DIRECT INPUTS #
MESSAGE
AVG MSG RETURN TIME: 0 ms UNRETURNED MSG COUNT: 0 DIRECT INPUT 1: On
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 96: On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time that it takes for Direct Output messages to be returned back to the sender in a Direct I/O ring configuration. Not applicable for non-ring configurations. This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10 messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT messages (one per communications channel) indicate the number of Direct Output messages that do not make the trip around the communications ring. High values for this count may indicate possible communications hardware/wiring problems. These values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command. The DIRECT INPUT X values represent the state of the x-th Direct Input. 6.2.11 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
# DIRECT DEVICES # STATUS

MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline DIRECT DEVICE 2 STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 8 STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of Direct Devices 1 through 8.
GE Multilin
6-5
6.3 METERING 6.3METERING UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES:
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
All phasors calculated by UR relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times. For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected by the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting defines a particular AC signal to be used as the reference. If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o
-315o positive angle direction
-180o
UR phase angle reference
0o
-135o
-45o
-90o
827845A1.CDR
Figure 61: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
6-6
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING 6.3.2 BUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING ! BUS
# BUS #
MESSAGE
# BUS ZONE 1 # # BUS ZONE 2 # # BUS ZONE 3 # # BUS ZONE 4 #
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING ! BUS ! BUS ZONE 1(4)
# BUS ZONE 1 #
MESSAGE
BUS ZONE 1 DIFF: 0.000 A 0.0 BUS ZONE 1 REST: 0.000 A 0.0
The differential and restraint currents phasors are available for each bus zone. The magnitudes are displayed in primary amperes. The angles used by the directional principle are also shown here (see the THEORY OF OPERATION chapter for additional details). 6.3.3 CURRENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" CURRENTS
# CURRENTS #
F1 CURRENT: 0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
S8 CURRENT: 0.000 A 0.0 6.3.4 VOLTAGES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" VOLTAGES
# VOLTAGES #
F5 VOLTAGE: 0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
S8 VOLTAGE: 0.000 V 0.0 6.3.5 FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" FREQUENCY
# FREQUENCY #
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz TRACKING FREQUENCY: 60.00 Hz
GE Multilin
6-7
6.4 RECORDS 6.4RECORDS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS ! EVENT RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4.1 EVENT RECORDS
# EVENT RECORDS #
EVENT: XXXX RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3 POWER ON EVENT: 2 POWER OFF EVENT: 1 EVENTS CLEARED
EVENT 3 DATE: 2000/07/14 EVENT 3 TIME: 14:53:00.03405 Date and Time Stamps
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records. 6.4.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
# OSCILLOGRAPHY #
MESSAGE
FORCE TRIGGER? No NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: 0 AVAILABLE RECORDS: 0 CYCLES PER RECORD: 0.0 LAST CLEARED DATE: 2000/07/14 015:40:16
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The cycles per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the OSCILLOGRAPHY section of Chapter 5. A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing the oscillography records.
6-8
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO ! MODEL INFORMATION
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
# MODEL INFORMATION #
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 1: OC ORDER CODE LINE 2: ORDER CODE LINE 3: ORDER CODE LINE 4: SERIAL NUMBER: ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 MANUFACTURING DATE: 0 OPERATING TIME: 0:00:00
Example code shown
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here. 6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO !" FIRMWARE REVISIONS
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS #
MESSAGE
REVISION:
3.00
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the application firmware. Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE) Value is 0 for each standard firmware release. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the boot program firmware. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of faceplate program firmware. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when product firmware was built. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when the boot program was built.
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER: 0 BOOT PROGRAM REVISION: 1.12 FRONT PANEL PROGRAM REVISION: 0.08 COMPILE DATE: 2000/09/08 04:55:16 BOOT DATE: 2000/05/11 16:41:32
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been installed.
GE Multilin
6-9
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6-10
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS
7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.1 MENU
COMMANDS "
MESSAGE
## COMMANDS ## VIRTUAL INPUTS ## COMMANDS ## CLEAR RECORDS ## COMMANDS ## SET DATE AND TIME ## COMMANDS ## RELAY MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The COMMANDS menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the PASSWORD SECURITY menu description in the PRODUCT SETUP section of Chapter 5. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry: COMMAND EXECUTED 7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip 1 Off

Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32 Off
Range: Off, On
7
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state Off (0) or On (1).
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
## COMMANDS ## CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? No CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleard by changing a command setting to "Yes" and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to "No".
GE Multilin
7-1
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS " SET DATE AND TIME
## COMMANDS ## SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME: 2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B signal is not in use. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked. 7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS " RELAY MAINTENANCE
## COMMANDS ## RELAY MAINTENANCE
PERFORM LAMPTEST? No UPDATE ORDER CODE? No
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting to "Yes" and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to "No". The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown. UPDATING... PLEASE WAIT There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the following message will be shown. ORDER CODE NOT UPDATED
7-2
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2TARGETS
7.2 TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS "
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT LATCHED
1:
Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown. Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16: LATCHED

MESSAGE
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the TARGETS menu. If no targets are active, the display will read: No Active Targets 7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message. The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed. Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY 1 2 3 ACTIVE STATUS OP PKP LATCHED DESCRIPTION element operated and still picked up element picked up and timed out element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example: UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED :Self Test Error 7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the TROUBLE indicator will turn on and a target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present. Major self-test errors also result in the following: the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation the faceplate IN SERVICE indicator is turned off a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
GE Multilin
7-3
7.2 TARGETS Table 72: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGE UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF TARGET PROBLEM MSG? No
PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION setting
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
HOW OFTEN THE TEST IS PERFORMED
WHAT TO DO
indicates relay is not in a programmed state. EQUIPMENT MISMATCH with 2nd-line detail message No
On power up and whenever the Program all settings (especially RELAY PROGRAMMED setting those under PRODUCT SETUP is altered. !" INSTALLATION).
Configuration of modules On power up; thereafter, the Check all module types against does not match the order backplane is checked for the order code, ensure they are code stored in the CPU. missing cards every 5 seconds. inserted properly, and cycle control power (if problem persists, contact the factory). Settings indicate the unit is not calibrated. FlexLogic equations do not compile properly. On power up. Event driven; whenever FlexLogic equations are modified. Contact the factory. Finish all equation editing and use self test to debug any errors. Cycle the control power (if the problem recurs, contact the factory).
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN with 2nd-line detail message DSP ERRORS: A/D RESET FAILURE A/D CAL FAILURE A/D INT. MISSING A/D VOLT REF. FAIL NO DSP INTERRUPTS DSP CHECKSUM FAILED DSP FAILED PROGRAM MEMORY Test Failed
No No Yes
CT/VT module with digital Every 1/8th of a cycle. signal processor may have a problem.
Yes
Error was found while checking Flash memory.
Once flash is uploaded with new firmware.
Contact the factory.
Table 73: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGE EEPROM CORRUPTED IRIG-B FAILURE LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM TARGET MSG? Yes No The non-volatile memory has been corrupted. Bad IRIG-B input signal. HOW OFTEN THE TEST IS PERFORMED On power up only. WHAT TO DO
Contact the factory.
7
PRIM ETHERNET FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL BATTERY FAIL No No No Primary Ethernet connection failed Secondary Ethernet connection failed Battery is not functioning.
Monitored whenever an IRIG- Ensure the IRIG-B cable is conB signal is received. nected to the relay. Check functionality of the cable (i.e. look for physical damage or perform a continuity test). Ensure the IRIG-B receiver is functioning properly. Check the input signal level; it may be lower than specification. If none of the above items apply, contact the factory. Monitored every 2 seconds Monitored every 2 seconds Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported after 1 minute if problem persists. On power up only. Check connections. Check connections. Replace the battery.
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE SYSTEM EXCEPTION or ABNORMAL RESTART LOW ON MEMORY WATCHDOG ERROR REMOTE DEVICE OFFLINE
Yes Yes
A prototype version of the firmware is loaded.
Contact the factory. Contact the factory.
Abnormal restart due to modules Event driven. being removed/inserted when powered-up, abnormal DC supply, or internal relay failure. Memory is close to 100% capacity Monitored every 5 seconds. Some tasks are behind schedule Event driven.
Yes No Yes
Contact the factory. Contact the factory.
One or more GOOSE devices are Event driven. Occurs when a Check GOOSE setup not responding device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving message. Time is 1 to 60 sec. depending on GOOSE protocol packets.
7-4
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1INTRODUCTION
8.1 INTRODUCTION 8.1.1 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
The figure below shows current inputs at the boundaries (through the dynamic bus replica) of the protected bus zone to the B90 via power system current transformers (CTs not shown).
Measuring Unit
Unbiased Differential Unit
Differential Unbiased
i1 i2
input currents
I1 I2
4
DIFUNB
6
Ratio Matching and Scaling
Phasor Estimation
Differential Current
ID
Pre-Filtering
i3
I3
DIF1
5 7
DIFL
DIF2
Restraining Current
IR
8
DIFH
L O G I C
iN
IN
DIFBIASED
Directional Element
10
DIR
Saturation Detector
SAT
11 9
Biased Differential Unit

836723A1.CDR
Figure 81: OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION The currents are digitally pre-filtered (Block 1) to remove the decaying DC components and other signal distortions. The filtered currents are scaled to accommodate different CT ratios (Block 2). Refer to Section 8.2: DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA AND RATIO MATCHING for more detail. The digital phasors estimation of the zone currents is performed in Block 3 and the differential (Block 4) and restraining (Block 5) signals are calculated. Refer to Section 8.3: DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE for the detail. It the magnitude of the differential signal exceeds a pre-determined threshold it operates the unbiased bus differential protection it is identified or flagged accordingly (Block 6). The differential and restraining currents are compared and their magnitudes determine the operating point on the dualslope operating characteristic. Two auxiliary flags (DIF1 and DIF2) that correspond to the different characteristic regions are produced (blocks 7 and 8). The dual-slope characteristic enhances relay performance in that different security measures are applicable for the regions. Refer to Section 8.3: DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE for details. The directional element (Block 10) supervises the biased differential characteristic when necessary. The directional current comparison principle evaluates all the input current phasors as well as the differential and restraining currents. Refer to Section 8.4: DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE for details. The saturation detector (Block 9) analyzes the differential and restraining currents as well as the samples of the input currents and sets its output flag upon detecting CT saturation. Refer to Section 8.5: SATURATION DETECTOR for detail. Finally the output logic (Block 11) combines the differential, directional and saturation information to operate the biased differential protection and flag it accordingly. The logic enhances performance of the relay while keeping an excellent balance between dependability/speed and security. Refer to Section 8.6: OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES for detail.
GE Multilin
8-1
8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA AND RATIO MATCHING 8.2DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA AND RATIO MATCHING
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.2.1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA MECHANISM
The bus differential zones of the B90 allow for protecting bus sections that include circuits that are switchable between different sections. Proper relay operation is achieved by associating a status signal with each input current. This mechanism is referred to as a dynamic bus replica. The dynamic bus zone is programmed as a number of CT inputstatusdirection entries. The status signal of a given CT inputstatus pair of the dynamic bus replica is a FlexLogic operand created to indicate whether or not the associated circuit (current) is connected to the protected bus zone. Normally, the status signals are to be created from input contacts wired to appropriate auxiliary contacts of isolator switches and/or breakers. 8.2.2 CT RATIO MATCHING The B90 allows for using CTs with various rated secondary currents and transformation ratios. Scaling to a common base is performed internally by the relay. The maximum allowable ratio mismatch is 32:1. For proper setting of the differential characteristic, it is imperative to understand the common base used by the relay. The B90 scales the secondary currents to the maximum primary current among the CTs defining a given bus differential zone: 1 per unit corresponds to the highest rated primary current. The scaling base is selected automatically by the relay during the configuration phase and is not affected by the dynamic aspect of the bus differential zone. This means that even though the circuit containing the CT with the maximum rated primary current is not connected to a given bus zone at a given time, the scaling base does not change (its connection status is off). EXAMPLE: Assume the CTs installed in the circuit defining the Bus Zone 1 have the following ratings: 1A CT: 600:5 1B CT: 500:1 1C CT: 600:5 1D CT: 1000:5 1E CT: 500:1 1F CT: 600:5
The maximum of 600, 500, 600, 1000, 500, and 600 is 1000 A which is therefore selected as the base upon configuration of the Bus Zone 1; 1 per unit (pu) represents 1000 A primary.
8-2
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.3DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE 8.3.1 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC
The B90 uses a dual-slope dual-breakpoint operating characteristic as shown in the figure below. The PICKUP setting is provided to cope with spurious differential signals when the bus carries a light load and there is no effective restraining signal. The first breakpoint (LOW BPNT) is provided to specify the limit of guaranteed linear operation of the CTs in the most unfavorable conditions such as high residual magnetism left in the magnetic cores or multiple autoreclosure shots. This point defines the upper limit for the application of the first slope (LOW SLOPE). The second breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) is provided to specify the limits of operation of the CTs without any substantial saturation. This point defines the lower limit for the application of the second slope (HIGH SLOPE).
|Id|
differential
OPERATE
HIGH SLOPE
BLOCK
LOW SLOPE HIGH BPNT LOW BPNT
PICKUP
Ir
restraining
836720A1.CDR
Figure 82: BIASED OPERATING CHARACTERISTIC The higher slope used by the B90 acts as an actual percentage bias regardless of the value of the restraining signal. This is so because the boundary of the operating characteristic in the higher slope region is a straight line intersecting the origin of the differential - restraining plane. The advantage of having a constant bias specified by the HIGH SLOPE setting creates an obstacle of a discontinuity between the first and second slopes. This is overcome by using a smooth approximation (cubic spline) of the characteristic between the lower and higher breakpoints. Consequently, the characteristic ensures: a constant percentage bias of LOW SLOPE for restraining currents below the lower breakpoint of LOW BPNT, a constant percentage bias of HIGH SLOPE for restraining currents above the higher breakpoint of HIGH BPNT, and a smooth transition from the bias of LOW SLOPE to HIGH SLOPE between the breakpoints. 8.3.2 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINING CURRENTS The differential current is produced as a sum of the phasors of the input currents of a differential bus zone taking into account the status signals of the currents, i.e. applying the dynamic bus replica of the protected zone. The differential current is scaled to the maximum rated primary current as explained in Section 8.1 INTRODUCTION. The scaling must be taken into account when setting the PICKUP value of the biased differential characteristic and the HIGH SET operating point of the unbiased differential function. The restraining current is produced as a maximum of the magnitudes of the phasors of the zone input currents taking into account the status signals of the currents, i.e. applying the dynamic bus replica of the protected bus zone. The restraining current is scaled to the maximum rated primary current as explained in Section 8.1: INTRODUCTION. The scaling must be taken into account when setting the breakpoints of the biased differential characteristic.
GE Multilin
8-3
8 THEORY OF OPERATION
The maximum of definition of the restraining signal biases the relay toward dependability without jeopardizing security as the relay uses additional means to cope with CT saturation on external faults. An additional benefit of this approach is that the restraining signal always represents a physical compared to an average or sum of current flowing through the CT that is most likely to saturate during given external fault. This brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operating characteristic. The following example is provided with respect to the breakpoint settings. EXAMPLE: Proceed with the previous example (see page 82) and assume that taking into account the relevant factors such as properties of the CTs themselves, resistance of the leads and burden of the CTs, the following primary currents are guaranteed to be transformed without significant saturation: 1A CT: 6.0 kA 1B CT: 7.5 kA 1C CT: 5.0 kA 1D CT: 13.0 kA 1E CT: 8.0 kA 1F CT: 9.0 kA
As having the lowest primary current guaranteeing operation without saturation, the CT associated with the 1C input is most exposed to saturation. During an external fault on the 1C circuit, the 1C CT will carry the fault current contributed by potentially all the remaining circuits. The fault current is higher than any contributing current, and therefore, the current of the 1C CT will become the restraining signal for the biased differential characteristic for external faults on the 1C circuit. Consequently, the higher breakpoint of the differential characteristic (HIGH BPNT) should be set not higher than 5000A : 1000A = 5 pu (1000A is the base unit; see page 82 for the example). The same approach applies to the setting of the lower breakpoint, LOW BPNT. 8.3.3 ENHANCED SECURITY In order to enhance the performance of the B90, the differential characteristic is divided into two regions having diverse operating modes as shown in following diagram. The first region applies to comparatively low differential currents and has been introduced to deal with CT saturation on low-current external faults. Certain distant external faults may cause CT saturation due to extremely long time constants of the DC component or multiple autoreclosure shots. The saturation, however, is difficult to detect in such cases. Additional security via the directional check is permanently applied to this region without regard to the saturation detector.
differential
Region 2 (high differential currents)
Region 1 (low differential currents)
restraining
836725A1.CDR
Figure 83: TWO REGIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC
8-4
GE Multilin
The second region includes the remaining portion of the differential characteristic and applies to comparatively high differential currents. If, during an external fault, the spurious differential current is high enough so that the differential-restraining current trajectory enters the second region, then saturation is guaranteed to be detected by the saturation detector. The B90 operates in the 2-out-of-2 mode in the first region of the differential characteristic. Both differential and directional principles (see Sections 8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE and 8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE) must confirm an internal fault in order for the biased differential element to operate. The relay operates in the dynamic 1-out-of-2 / 2-out-of-2 mode in the second region of the differential characteristic. If the saturation detector (see Section 8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR) does not detect CT saturation, the differential protection principle alone is capable of operating the biased differential element. If CT saturation is detected, both differential and directional principles must confirm an internal fault in order for the biased differential element to operate. Because of diverse operating modes in the first and second regions of the differential characteristic, the user gains double control over the dependability and security issues. The first level includes slopes and breakpoints of the characteristic with regard to the amount of the bias. The second level includes control over the split between the first and second regions of the characteristic. The unbiased differential element responds to the differential current alone. The saturation detector and directional element do not apply to the unbiased differential element.
GE Multilin
8-5
8.4 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE 8.4DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.4.1 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE
For better security, the B90 uses the current directional protection principle to dynamically supervise the main current differential function. The directional principle is in effect permanently for low differential currents (Region 1 in Figure 83: TWO REGIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC) and is switched on dynamically for large differential currents (Region 2 in sam figure) by the saturation detector (see Section 8.5: SATURATION DETECTOR) upon detecting CT saturation. The directional principle responds to a relative direction of the fault currents. This means that a reference signal, such as bus voltage, is not required. The directional principle declares that if all of the fault currents flow in one direction, the fault is internal, or if at least one fault current flows in an opposite direction compared with the sum of the remaining currents, the fault is external.
The directional principle is implemented in two stages. 1. First, based on the magnitude of a given current, it is determined whether the current is a fault current. If so, its relative phase relation has to be considered. The angle check must not be initiated for the load currents as the direction will be out of the bus even during internal faults. The auxiliary comparator of this stage applies an adaptable threshold. The threshold is a fraction of the restraining current. Second, for and only for the selected fault currents, the phase angle between a given current and the sum of all remaining currents is checked. The sum of all remaining currents is the differential current less the current under consideration. Therefore, for each, say the pth, current to be considered, the angle between the phasors Ip and ID Ip is checked.
2.
Ideally, during external faults, the said angle is close to 180 (see below); during internal faults it is close to 0.
External Fault Conditions
Ip imag ID I p
BLOCK ID - Ip
OPERATE
Ip
Ip real ID I p
BLOCK OPERATE
836726A2.CDR
Figure 84: OPERATION OF DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE DURING EXTERNAL FAULTS

Internal Fault Conditions
Ip imag ID I p
BLOCK
OPERATE ID - Ip Ip
Ip real ID I p
BLOCK OPERATE
836727A2.CDR
Figure 85: OPERATION OF DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE DURING INTERNAL FAULTS The B90 implementation calculates the maximum angle for the considered currents and compares it against a fixed threshold of 90. The flag indicating if the directional protection principle is satisfied is available as FlexLogic operand BUS 1(4) DIR.
8-6
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5SATURATION DETECTOR
8.5 SATURATION DETECTOR 8.5.1 SATURATION DETECTOR
The saturation detector of the B90 takes advantage of the fact that any CT operates correctly for a short period of time even under very large primary currents that would subsequently cause a very deep saturation. As a result of that, in the case of an external fault, the differential current stays very low during the initial period of linear operation of the CTs while the restraining signal develops rapidly. Once one or more CTs saturate, the differential current will increase. The restraining signal, however, yields by at least a few milliseconds. During internal faults, both the differential and restraining currents develop simultaneously. This creates characteristic patterns for the differential - restraining trajectory as depicted below.
differential
TTER N
ULT P A
INTE RNAL FA
FAU
A LT P
OPERATE
RN TTE
EXTERNAL FAULT PATT
ERN
AL ERN EXT
BLOCK
restraining
836728A1.CDR
Figure 86: CT SATURATION DETECTION: INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FAULT PATTERNS The CT saturation condition is declared by the saturation detector when the magnitude of the restraining signal becomes larger than the higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) and at the same time the differential current is below the first slope (LOW SLOPE). The said condition is of a transient nature and requires a seal-in. A special logic in the form of a state machine is used for this purpose as depicted in Figure 87: SATURATION DETECTOR state machine. As the phasor estimator introduces a delay into the measurement process, the aforementioned saturation test would fail to detect CT saturation occurring very fast. In order to cope with very fast CT saturation, another condition is checked that uses relations between the signals at the waveform level. The basic principle is similar to that described above. Additionally, the sample-based stage of the saturation detector uses the time derivative of the restraining signal (di/dt) to better trace the saturation pattern shown in the above diagram. The saturation detector is capable of detecting saturation occurring in approximately 2 ms into a fault. It is worth emphasizing that the saturation detector, although having no dedicated settings, uses the main differential characteristic for proper operation. This must be kept in mind when setting the characteristic as its parameters must retain their original meaning. The operation of the saturation detector is available as the FlexLogic operand BUS 1(4) SAT.
NORMAL
SAT := 0
The differential current below the first slope for a certain period of time saturation condition
EXTERNAL FAULT
SAT := 1
The differential characteristic entered
EXTERNAL FAULT and CT SATURATION
The differentialrestraining trajectory out of the differential characteristic for a certain period of time
SAT := 1
836729A1.CDR
Figure 87: SATURATION DETECTOR STATE MACHINE
GE Multilin
8-7
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES 8.6OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES The biased differential characteristic uses the output logic shown below.
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.6.1 OUTPUT LOGIC
For low differential signals, the biased differential element operates on the 2-out-of-2 basis utilizing both the differential and directional principles. For high differential signals, the directional principle is included only if demanded by the saturation detector (dynamic 1-outof-2 / 2-out-of-2 mode). Typically, the directional principle is slower, and by avoiding using it when possible, the B90 gains speed. The dynamic inclusion/exclusion of the directional principle is not applied for the low differential currents but is included permanently only because it is comparatively difficult to reliably detect CT saturation occurring when the currents are small, i.e. saturation due to extremely long time constant of the DC component or due to multiple autoreclosure actions.
DIFL
AND
DIR OR OR SAT AND DIFH
biased bus differential DIFBIASED
836730A1.CDR
Figure 88: OUTPUT LOGIC OF BIASED DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION 8.6.2 INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLES Two examples of relay operation are presented: an external fault with heavy CT saturation and an internal fault. The protected bus includes six circuits connected to CT terminals F1, F5, M1, M5, U1 and U5, respectively. The circuits F1, F5, M1, M5 and U5 are capable of feeding some fault current; the U1 circuit supplies a load. The F1, F5 and U5 circuits are significantly stronger than the F5 and M1 connections. The M5 circuit contains the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT of the bus. Figure 8-10 presents the bus currents and the most important logic signals for the case of an external fault. Despite very fast and severe CT saturation, the B90 remains stable. Figure 8-11 presents the same signals but for the case of an internal fault. The B90 trips in 10 ms (fast form-C output contact).
8-8
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
200 150 100 50 0 -50 -100 -150 -200 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 0.11 0.12
~1 ms
Figure 89: EXTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE

The CT saturation flag is set safely before the pickup flag

The bus differential protection element picks up due to heavy CT saturation The directional flag is not set The element does not maloperate
Despite heavy CT saturation the external fault current is seen in the opposite direction
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
836735A1.CDR
8-9
8-10
The bus differential protection element picks up The saturation flag is not set - no directional decision required All the fault currents are seen in one direction The element operates in 10ms The directional flag is set
836736A1.CDR
8.6 OUTPUT LOGIC AND EXAMPLES
Figure 810: INTERNAL FAULT EXAMPLE
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1INTRODUCTION
9.1 INTRODUCTION 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides an example of setting calculations for a sample bus. The selected example includes various bus configurations to clarify a number of typical situations. Both the bus configuration and numerical data used are not meant to reflect any specific utility practice or design standards. It is also assumed that the CTs have been selected without considering a B90 application, but the B90 settings are to be calculated for proper relay application. The CT data used in this example are kept to a minimum and in a generic form. The CT data does not reflect any particular notation or national standards. The analysis provided in this chapter has been performed with the following goals: The limits of linear operation of the CTs considering zero remanent flux have been determined in order to select the high breakpoint settings of the biased differential characteristic. The limits of linear operation of the CTs considering a remanent flux of 80% have been determined in order to select the low breakpoint settings of the biased differential characteristic. Saturation of the CTs has been analyzed in order to select the higher slope of the biased differential characteristic and the high set differential overcurrent setting.
The analysis tools and safety margins applied are examples only and do not reflect any particular protection philosophy. Typically, for the CT saturation related calculations, it is sufficient to consider the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT connected to the bus and the total bus fault current combined with the longest time constant among all the circuits connected to the bus. This chapter provides more detailed analysis (see Section 9.5: SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD) in order to illustrate the idea of using setting groups to enhance the B90 performance when the bus configuration changes (see Section 9.7: ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE).
GE Multilin
9-1
9.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA 9.2SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2.1 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA
The following figure shows a double bus arrangement with NORTH and SOUTH buses. This station has five circuits (C-1 through C-5) and a tiebreaker (B-7). Circuit C-1 is connected to the NORTH bus; circuits C-2, C-3 and C-4 can be routed to either bus via switches S-1 through S-6; circuit C-5 can be connected to either bus via breakers B-5 and B-6.
C-3
C-5 NORTH BUS
B-1 CT-1 CT-2 B-2
S-1
S-3
S-5 B-5 CT-7
CT-3
B-3
CT-4
B-4
CT-5 B-7 CT-6 CT-8 B-6
S-2
S-4
S-6
SOUTH BUS C-1 C-2 C-4
836731A2.CDR
Figure 91: SAMPLE BUS CONFIGURATION The following table shows the assumed short circuit contributions of the connected circuits and their DC time constants. Table 91: BASIC FAULT DATA OF THE CONNECTED CIRCUITS
CIRCUIT C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 IFAULT (KA) 0.00 0.00 6.00 5.00 3.00 TDC (MS) N/A N/A 5 30 40
The basic CT data is presented in the table below. The magnetizing characteristics of the three different types of CTs used in this example are shown in the following figure. Table 92: BASIC CT DATA
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 RATIO 600:5 600:5 1200:5 1000:5 1000:5 1200:5 VSAT (V) 144 144 288 240 240 288 RCTSEC () 0.34 0.34 0.64 0.54 0.54 0.64 LEADS (M) 210 205 200 200 180 200
CT-4 CT-5, CT-6 CT-7, CT-8
9-2
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.2 SAMPLE BUSBAR AND DATA
836732A4.CDR
Figure 92: APPROXIMATE CT MAGNETIZING CHARACTERISTICS
GE Multilin
9-3
9.3 ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA 9.3ZONING AND DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.3.1 NORTH BUS ZONE
With reference to the following figure, the NORTH bus differential zone is bounded by the following CTs: CT-1, CT-2 (if S-1 closed), CT-3 (if S-3 closed), CT-4 (if S-5 closed), CT-5 and CT-8. The NORTH bus protection should operate the following breakers: B-1, B-2 (if S-1 closed), B-3 (if S-3 closed), B-4 (if S-5 closed), B-5 and B-7.
C-3
C-5 NORTH BUS
B-1 CT-1
S-1
S-3
S-5 B-5
CT-2
B-2
CT-3
B-3
CT-4
B-4
CT-7 CT-5 B-7 CT-6 CT-8 B-6
S-2
S-4
S-6
SOUTH BUS C-1 C-2 C-4

836733A1.CDR
Figure 93: NORTH BUS ZONE 9.3.2 SOUTH BUS ZONE The SOUTH bus differential zone is bounded by the following CTs: CT-2 (if S-2 closed), CT-3 (if S-4 closed), CT-4 (if S-6 closed), CT-6 and CT-7. The SOUTH bus protection should operate the following breakers: B-2 (if S-2 closed), B-3 (if S-4 closed), B-4 (if S-6 closed), B-6 and B-7.
C-3 C-5 NORTH BUS
B-1 CT-1
S-1
S-3
S-5 B-5
CT-2
B-2
CT-3
B-3
CT-4
B-4
CT-7 CT-5 B-7 CT-6 CT-8 B-6
S-2
S-4
S-6
9
C-1 C-2 C-4
SOUTH BUS
836734A1.CDR
Figure 94: SOUTH BUS ZONE
9-4
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
9.4 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS 9.4.1 DESCRIPTION
The limits of linear operation of the CTs need to be found in order to set the breakpoints of the biased differential characteristic. The settings for the NORTH and SOUTH bus relays are analyzed simultaneously from this point on as the two differential zones share some CTs and the results of computations apply to both the relays. For microprocessor-based relays it is justified to assume the burden of the CTs to be resistive. The limits of the linear operation of a CT, neglecting the effects of the DC component and residual magnetism, can be approximated as follows: V sat I max = ---------Rs where: Imax is the maximum secondary current transformed without saturation (AC component only, no residual magnetism), Rs is the total burden resistance, Vsat is the saturation voltage of the CT.
(EQ 9.1)
The total burden resistance depends on both the fault type and connection of the CTs. For single-line-to-ground faults and CTs connected in Wye, the burden resistance is calculated as: R s = 2R lead + R CTsec + R relay where: Rlead is the lead resistance (one way, hence the factor of 2) RCTsec is the secondary CT resistance Rrelay is the relay input resistance.
(EQ 9.2)
Assuming 0.003 /m lead resistance and approximating the B90 input resistance for the 5A input CTs as 0.2 VA / (5 A)2 or 0.008 , the limits of the linear operation of the CTs have been calculated and presented in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs. 9.4.2 HIGH BREAKPOINT As an external fault may happen on any of the connected circuits, threatening saturation of any of the CTs, the minimum value of the linear operation limit should be taken as the HIGH BPNT setting. The limit of linear operation that neglects both the residual magnetism and the effect of the DC component should be the base for setting the higher breakpoint of the biased differential characteristic. The B90 requires the breakpoints to be entered as pu values. The relay uses the largest primary current of the CTs bounding the bus differential zone as a base for the pu settings. Both the NORTH and SOUTH buses have the largest primary current of the CTs of 1200A (CT-7 and CT-8), thus upon configuration of the relays, 1200A is automatically selected as base for the pu quantities. With a given Ibase current, the limits of linear operation have been recalculated to pu values as follows: I max ( secondary ) I max ( pu ) = ----------------------------------- CT ratio I base Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTS
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 CT-4 CT-5, CT-6 CT-7, CT-8 RS () 1.61 1.58 1.85 1.75 1.63 1.85 IMAX (A SEC) 89.55 91.25 155.84 137.30 147.42 155.84 IMAX (PU) (NO REMANENCE) 8.96 9.13 31.17 22.88 24.57 31.17 IMAX (PU) (80% REMANENCE) 1.79 1.83 6.23 4.58 4.91 6.23 (EQ 9.3)
The third and fourth columns of the above table have the following significance:
GE Multilin
9-5
9.4 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS
If an external fault occurs on circuit C-1, CT-1 will carry the fault current. As the fault current is higher than any of the other currents, the current supplied by CT-1 will be used as the restraint signal. CT-1 is guaranteed to saturate if the current exceeds 89.55 A secondary, or 17.9 times its rated current, or 8.96 pu of the bus differential zone. Consequently, considering CT-1, the value of 8.96 pu should be used as the higher breakpoint of the characteristic. Considering CTs that could be connected (depending on the positions of the switches) to the NORTH bus, the HIGH BPNT for the NORTH bus zone should be selected as the minimum of (8.96, 9.13, 31.17, 22.88, 24.57, 31.17), or 8.96 pu. Considering CTs that could be connected (depending on the positions of the switches) to the SOUTH bus, the HIGH BPNT for the SOUTH bus zone should be selected as the minimum of (9.13, 31.17, 22.88, 24.57, 31.17), or 9.13 pu. 9.4.3 LOW BREAKPOINT The DC component in the primary current may saturate a given CT even with the AC current below the suggested value of the higher breakpoint. The relay copes with this threat by using the Saturation Detector and applying a 2-out-of-2 operating principle upon detecting saturation. The residual magnetism (remanence) in the core of a CT can limit the linear operation of the CT significantly. It is justified to assume that the residual flux could be as high as 80% of the saturation level leaving only 20% to accommodate the flux component created by the primary current. This phenomenon is reflected by reducing the saturation voltage in the calculations by the factor of 100% / 20%, or 5. This is the equivalent to reducing the limit of linear operation by the factor of 5, hence the last column in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs. For example, if the residual flux in the core of the CT-1 is as high as 80% of its saturation level, the CT will saturate at 17.92 A secondary, or 3.58 times its rated current, or at 1.79 pu of the bus differential zone. The reduced limit of linear operation should be used as the lower breakpoint of the biased differential characteristic, LOW BPNT. This way the region between the lower to higher breakpoints covers the indistinct area of possible saturation due to the random factor of residual magnetism. The LOW BPNT should be set at 1.79 pu for the NORTH bus zone, and at 1.83 pu for the SOUTH bus zone. A combination of very high residual magnetism and a DC component with a long time constant may saturate a given CT even with the AC current below the suggested value of the lower breakpoint. The relay copes with this threat by using a 2out-of-2 operating mode for low differential currents.
9-6
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.5SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9.5 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9.5.1 DESCRIPTION
To set the higher slope and threshold of the high set (unbiased) differential operation, external faults must be analyzed. Consider an external fault for the NORTH bus relay. It is justified to assume bus configurations that give maximum stress to the maximum number of CTs. For this purpose we will assume the tie breaker, B-7 closed; all the circuitry capable of supplying the fault current to be in service; moreover, they are connected to the SOUTH bus in order to analyze the CT-7 and CT-8 carrying the fault current. 9.5.2 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1 Table 94 presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-1 (C-1 is connected to the NORTH bus, C-3, C-4 and C-5 are connected to the SOUTH bus). To cater for the worst conditions, it has been assumed that the fault current is a sum of several circuit contributions (C-3, C4, and C-5 in this case) and its DC component time constant is the maximum of the contributing circuit time constants. The fault current is supplied from circuits C-3, C-4, and C-5 connected to the SOUTH bus, with currents flowing through CT-3, CT-4, and CT-6. The fault current through the tie-breaker potential threatens saturation of CT-7 and CT-8. By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in Table 94) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4 in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs), it is concluded that CT-1 will saturate during this fault, producing a spurious differential signal for the NORTH bus zone differential protection. All other CTs will not saturate due to the AC components. The amount of the spurious differential current (magnetizing current of CT-1) can be calculated using the burden, magnetizing characteristic and primary current of the noted CT by solving the following equations: I relay = I s I magnetizing
2 2
I relay R s = V magnetizing
(EQ 9.4)
For Is = 116.67 A, Rs = 1.61 and the characteristic shown in Figure 92: APPROXIMATE CT MAGNETIZING CHARACTERISTICS, the solution is Imagnetizing = 29.73 A, Irelay = 112.8 A. The magnetizing current of the saturated CT-1 will appear to the differential element protecting the NORTH bus as a differential signal of 29.73 A, while the restraint signal will be the maximum of the bus currents (112.8 A in this case). Consequently, the higher slope of the characteristic should not be lower than 29.73 A / 112.8 A, or 26%, and the pick up of the high set differential elements should not be lower than 29.73 A, or 2.97 pu. The CTs identified as operating in the linear mode as far as the AC components are considered may, however, saturate due to the DC components. Saturation will not occur if V sat > I s R s ( 1 + T dc ) , where is radian system frequency (2f). ( Vsat I s R s ) 1 If the above condition is violated, saturation will occur but not before: T sat = T dc ln 1 ---------------------------------------- T dc Columns 6 and 7 of the table below summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-1. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7 and CT-8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate spurious differential signal for both the NORTH and SOUTH bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 4.7 ms and will be detected by the Saturation Detector. The transient saturation of the CTs due to the DC component may be neglected when setting the slopes of the characteristic as the saturation will be detected and the relay will use the current directional principle. It must however, be taken into account when setting the high set (unbiased) differential element. Table 94: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-1
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 CT-4 CT-6 CT-7, CT-8 IFAULT (KA) 14.0 0 6.0 5.0 3.0 14.0 IFAULT (A SEC) 116.67 0.00 25.00 25.00 15.00 58.33 TDC (MS) 40 N/A 5 30 40 40 AC SATURATION Yes No No No No No DC SATURATION Yes No No Yes Yes Yes TSAT (MS) N/A N/A N/A 15.19 35.25 4.70
GE Multilin
9-7
9.5 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.5.3 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-2
The following table presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-2 (C-2 is connected to the NORTH bus, C-3, C-4 and C-5 are connected to the SOUTH bus). By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the following table) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4 in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs) it is concluded that CT-2 will saturate during this fault producing a spurious differential signal. All other CTs will not saturate due to the AC components. The amount of the spurious differential current (magnetizing current of CT-2) can be calculated using the burden, magnetizing characteristic and the primary current of the said CT. For Is = 116.67 A, Rs = 1.23 and the characteristic shown in Figure 92: APPROXIMATE CT MAGNETIZING CHARACTERISTICS, the solution is Imagnetizing = 27.69 A, Irelay = 113.3 A. The magnetizing current of the saturated CT-2 will appear to the differential element protecting the NORTH bus as a differential signal of 27.69 A, while the restraint signal will be the maximum of the bus currents (113.3 A). Consequently, the higher slope of the characteristic should not be lower than 27.69 A / 113.3 A, or 24% and the pick up of the high set differential elements should not be lower than 27.69 A, or 2.77 pu. Columns 6 and 7 of the following table summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-2. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7 and CT8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate spurious differential signal for both the NORTH and SOUTH bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 4.7 ms and will be detected by the Saturation Detector. Table 95: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-2
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 CT-4 CT-6 CT-7, CT-8 IFAULT (KA) 0 14.0 6.0 5.0 3.0 14.0 IFAULT (A SEC) 0.00 116.67 25.00 25.00 15.00 58.33 TDC (MS) N/A 40 5 30 40 40 AC SATURATION No Yes No No No No DC SATURATION No Yes No Yes Yes Yes TSAT (MS) N/A N/A N/A 15.19 35.25 4.70
9.5.4 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-3 The following table presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-3 (C-3 is connected to the NORTH bus, C-4 and C-5 are connected to the SOUTH bus). By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the table below) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4 in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs), it is concluded that none of the CTs will saturate due to the AC currents during this fault. Columns 6 and 7 of the table below summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-3. CT-3, CT-4, CT-6, CT-7 and CT-8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate a spurious differential signal for both the NORTH and SOUTH bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 11.18 ms and will be detected by the Saturation Detector. Table 96: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-3
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 CT-4 CT-6 CT-7, CT-8 IFAULT (KA) 0 0 8.0 5.0 3.0 8.0 IFAULT (A SEC) 0.00 0.00 33.33 25.00 15.00 33.33 TDC (MS) N/A N/A 40 30 40 40 AC SATURATION No No No No No No DC SATURATION No No Yes Yes Yes Yes TSAT (MS) N/A N/A 11.18 15.19 35.25 11.18
9-8
GE Multilin
9.5 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD 9.5.5 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-4
The following table presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-4 (C-4 is connected to the NORTH bus, C-3 and C-5 are connected to the SOUTH bus). By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the table below) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4 in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs), it is concluded that none of the CTs will saturate due to the AC currents during this fault. Columns 6 and 7 of the following table summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-4. CT-4, CT-6, CT-7 and CT8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate a spurious differential signal for both the NORTH and SOUTH bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 5.85 ms and will be detected by the Saturation Detector. Table 97: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-4
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 CT-4 CT-6 CT-7, CT-8 IFAULT (KA) 0 0 6.0 9.0 3.0 9.0 IFAULT (A SEC) 0.00 0.00 25.00 45.00 15.00 37.50 TDC (MS) N/A N/A 5 40 40 40 AC SATURATION No No No No No No DC SATURATION No No No Yes Yes Yes TSAT (MS) N/A N/A N/A 5.85 35.25 9.40
9.5.6 EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-5 The following table presents the results of analysis of an external fault on circuit C-5 (C-5 is connected to the NORTH bus, C-3 and C-4 are connected to the SOUTH bus). By comparing the secondary currents (column 3 in the table below) with the limits of linear operation for the CTs (column 4 in Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs), it is concluded that none of the CTs will saturate due to the AC currents during this fault. Columns 6 and 7 of the following table summarize the DC saturation threat for the fault on C-5. CT-4, CT-5, CT-7 and CT8 may saturate due to the DC components and may generate a spurious differential signal for both the NORTH and SOUTH bus relays depending on the bus configuration. The saturation will not occur before 4.83 ms and will be detected by the Saturation Detector. Table 98: CALCULATIONS FOR THE EXTERNAL FAULTS ON C-5
CT CT-1 CT-2 CT-3 CT-4 CT-5 CT-7, CT-8 IFAULT (KA) 0 0 6.0 5.0 11.0 11.0 IFAULT (A SEC) 0.00 0.00 25.00 25.00 55.00 45.83 TDC (MS) N/A N/A 5 30 30 30 AC SATURATION No No No No No No DC SATURATION No No No Yes Yes Yes TSAT (MS) N/A N/A N/A 15.19 4.83 7.16
GE Multilin
9-9
9.6 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS 9.6BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.6.1 DESCRIPTION
Taking the above analysis into account, the settings have been calculated as shown in Tables 9-9 and 9-10. Table 99: SETTINGS OF THE NORTH BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
SETTING PICKUP VALUE 0.1 pu COMMENTS Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/ dependability requirements. The pu value is for the base of 1200A. This means the actual pickup is 120 A primary. Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/ dependability requirements. None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 1.79 pu even with 80% remanence. The dc component, however, combined with the remanence may saturate some CTs even for currents below 1.79 pu. The relay copes with saturation using the current directional principle. Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/ dependability requirements. The value of 60% ensures that the differential characteristic alone (without the directional principle) will work correctly under ac saturation of the CTs (26% of spurious differential during the fault on C-1 saturating CT-1). None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 8.96 pu. The dc component, however, may saturate some CTs even for currents below 8.96 pu. The relay copes with saturation using the current directional principle. The maximum spurious differential current is 2.97 pu. Due to limited accuracy of analysis and the effect of dc saturation a security factor of 2 has been adopted. The highest internal fault current is 14kA, or 11.67 pu giving a good chance to clear a number of faults by the unbiased differential operation.
LOW SLOPE LOW BPNT
25% 1.79 pu
HIGH SLOPE
60%
HIGH BPNT
8.96
HIGH SET
5.94
Table 910: SETTINGS OF THE SOUTH BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

SETTING PICKUP VALUE 0.1 pu COMMENTS Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/ dependability requirements. The pu value is for the base of 1200A. This means the actual pickup is 120 A primary. Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/ dependability requirements. None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 1.83 pu even with 80% remanence. The dc component, however, combined with the remanence may saturate some CTs even for currents below 1.83 pu. The relay copes with saturation using the current directional principle. Default value. Lower or higher values may be entered upon security/ dependability requirements. The value of 60% ensures that the differential characteristic alone (without the directional principle) will work correctly under ac saturation of the CTs (24% of spurious differential during the fault on C-2 saturating CT-2). None of the CTs will saturate for ac currents below 9.13 pu. The dc component, however, may saturate some CTs even for currents below 9.13 pu. The relay copes with saturation using the current directional principle. The maximum spurious differential current is 2.77 pu. Due to limited accuracy of analysis and the effect of dc saturation a security factor of 2 has been adopted. The highest internal fault current is 14kA, or 11.67 pu giving a good chance to clear a number of faults by the unbiased differential operation.
LOW SLOPE LOW BPNT
25% 1.83 pu
HIGH SLOPE
60%
HIGH BPNT
9.13 pu
HIGH SET
5.54
9-10
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.7ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE
9.7 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE 9.7.1 USING SETTING GROUPS
In the example of the SOUTH bus, CT-2 is the weakest (most prone to saturation) CT dictating values of some settings. However, CT-2 may not be a part of the SOUTH bus protection zone if the S-2 switch is opened. As the position of the switch must be provided for the dynamic bus replica, the status of the switch may be re-used to control the setting groups and apply more sensitive settings if the weakest CT is not part of the bus zone at a given time. For example, if the S-2 switch is opened while the S-6 switch is closed, the CT-4 becomes the weakest CT connected to the SOUTH bus. The higher breakpoint (HIGH BPNT) could be increased to 22.88 pu (fourth column of Table 93: LIMITS OF LINEAR OPERATION OF THE CTs). The lower breakpoint (LOW BPNT) could be increased to 4.58 pu (fifth column of Table 9-3). The higher slope (HIGH SLOPE) could be decreased as no AC saturation is possible for the SOUTH bus CTs (see Tables 96, 97, and 9-8). The concept could be implemented by using: The FlexLogic to process the status signals in order to identify the weakest CT. The Setting Groups to switch dynamically from one setting group to another (adaptive settings).
This approach may be extended even further for buses that do not require the dynamic bus replica mechanism. This could include approximation of the total bus fault current using positions of all switches and breakers and optimizing the settings depending on the amount of stress imposed on the CTs in any particular bus configuration.
GE Multilin
9-11
9.7 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE
9-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A APPENDIX A FLEXANALOG PARAMETERSA.1FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS
A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS A.1.1 PARAMETER LIST
A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 1 of 2)
SETTING DISPLAY TEXT 0 28416 28418 28419 28421 28422 28424 28425 28427 28428 28430 28431 28433 28434 28436 28437 28439 28440 28442 28443 28445 28446 28448 28449 28451 28452 28454 28455 28457 28458 28460 28461 28463 28464 28466 28467 28469 28470 28472 28473 28475 28476 28478 28479 Off F1 Curr Mag F1 Curr Ang F2 Curr Mag F2 Curr Ang F3 Curr Mag F3 Curr Ang F4 Curr Mag F4 Curr Ang F5 Curr Mag F5 Curr Ang F6 Curr Mag F6 Curr Ang F7 Curr Mag F7 Curr Ang F8 Curr Mag F8 Curr Ang L1 Curr Mag L1 Curr Ang L2 Curr Mag L2 Curr Ang L3 Curr Mag L3 Curr Ang L4 Curr Mag L4 Curr Ang L5 Curr Mag L5 Curr Ang L6 Curr Mag L6 Curr Ang L7 Curr Mag L7 Curr Ang L8 Curr Mag L8 Curr Ang S1 Curr Mag S1 Curr Ang S2 Curr Mag S2 Curr Ang S3 Curr Mag S3 Curr Ang S4 Curr Mag S4 Curr Ang S5 Curr Mag S5 Curr Ang S6 Curr Mag DESCRIPTION Placeholder for unused settings TRM 1 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 1 Current Angle () TRM 2 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 2 Current Angle () TRM 3 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 3 Current Angle () TRM 4 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 4 Current Angle () TRM 5 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 5 Current Angle () TRM 6 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 6 Current Angle () TRM 7 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 7 Current Angle () TRM 8 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 8 Current Angle () TRM 9 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 9 Current Angle () TRM 10 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 10 Current Angle () TRM 11 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 11 Current Angle () TRM 12 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 12 Current Angle () TRM 13 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 13 Current Angle () TRM 14 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 14 Current Angle () TRM 15 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 15 Current Angle () TRM 16 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 16 Current Angle () TRM 17 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 17 Current Angle () TRM 18 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 18 Current Angle () TRM 19 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 19 Current Angle () TRM 20 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 20 Current Angle () TRM 21 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 21 Current Angle () TRM 22 Current Magnitude (kA) 32256 32258 32259 32261 32262 32268 32270 32271 32273 32274 32280 32282 32283 32285 32286 32292 32294 32295 32297 32298 40960 40971
Table A1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 2 of 2)

SETTING DISPLAY TEXT 28481 28482 28484 28485 28487 28624 28625 S6 Curr Ang S7 Curr Mag S7 Curr Ang S8 Curr Mag S8 Curr Ang Tracking Frequency Bus 1 Diff Mag Bus 1 Diff Angle Bus 1 Rest Mag Bus 1 Rest Angle Bus 1 Max CT Bus 2 Diff Mag Bus 2 Diff Angle Bus 2 Rest Mag Bus 2 Rest Angle Bus 2 Max CT Bus 3 Diff Mag Bus 3 Diff Angle Bus 3 Rest Mag Bus 3 Rest Angle Bus 3 Max CT Bus 4 Diff Mag Bus 4 Diff Angle Bus 4 Rest Mag Bus 4 Rest Angle Bus 4 Max CT Communications Group Active Setting Group DESCRIPTION TRM 22 Current Angle () TRM 23 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 23 Current Angle () TRM 24 Current Magnitude (kA) TRM 24 Current Angle () Terminal Tracking Frequency (Hz) B90 Bus Zone DMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle () B90 Bus Zone RMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle () B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle () B90 Bus Zone RMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle () B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle () B90 Bus Zone RMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle () B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle () B90 Bus Zone RMag (kA) B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle () B90 Bus Max CT Communications Group Current Setting Group
System Frequency Terminal Frequency (Hz)
GE Multilin
A-1
A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS
APPENDIX A
A-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B APPENDIX B MODBUS RTU PROTOCOLB.1OVERVIEW
B.1 OVERVIEW B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that: The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master computer. For Modbus, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands. B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER The Modbus RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in all configurations. See Chapter 3: HARDWARE for details on wiring. Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300). The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the COMMUNICATIONS section of the SETTINGS chapter for further details. The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the address is the broadcast address see below). A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will accept any address when the Modbus RTU protocol is used. B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code. Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA CRC DEAD TIME SIZE 1 byte 1 byte N bytes 2 bytes 3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
GE Multilin
B-1
B.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
A master transmit packet with a slave address of 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link will take action based on the packet, but none will respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated with FUNCTION CODE 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored. FUNCTION CODE:
This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the EXCEPTION RESPONSES section for further details. DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16 bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 ALGORITHM section for a description of how to calculate the CRC. DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.1 OVERVIEW B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder. Note: A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request. Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS: --> A Alow Ahigh CRC i,j (+) N Di G shr (x) ALGORITHM: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. data transfer 16 bit working register low order byte of A high order byte of A 16 bit CRC-16 result loop counters logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator total number of data bytes i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1) 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits are shifted right one location) FFFF (hex) --> A 0 --> i 0 --> j Di (+) Alow --> Alow j + 1 --> j shr (A) Is there a carry? Is j = 8? i + 1 --> i Is i = N? A --> CRC No: go to 3 Yes: continue No: go to 8 Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue. No: go to 5 Yes: continue
GE Multilin
B-3
B.2 FUNCTION CODES B.2FUNCTION CODES
APPENDIX B B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE HEX DEC 3 4 5 6 16 Read Holding Registers Read Holding Registers Force Single Coil Preset Single Register Preset Multiple Registers Read Actual Values or Settings Read Actual Values or Settings Execute Operation Store Single Setting Store Multiple Settings MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
03 04 05 06 10
B.2.2 FUNCTION CODE 03H/04H: READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay. Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the section MODBUS MEMORY MAP for exact details on the data registers. Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3 register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively. Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF REGISTERS - hi NUMBER OF REGISTERS - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 40 50 00 03 A7 4A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - hi DATA #1 - lo DATA #2 - hi DATA #2 - lo DATA #3 - hi DATA #3 - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 06 00 28 01 2C 00 00 0D 60
B-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2 FUNCTION CODES B.2.3 FUNCTION CODE 05H: EXECUTE OPERATION
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are in the table SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The hi and lo CODE VALUE bytes always have the values FF and 00 respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code. Table B4: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - hi OPERATION CODE - lo CODE VALUE - hi CODE VALUE - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - hi OPERATION CODE - lo CODE VALUE - hi CODE VALUE - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A
Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES (FUNCTION CODE 05H)

OPERATION CODE (HEX) 0000 0001 0005 0006 1000 to 101F DEFINITION NO OPERATION RESET CLEAR EVENT RECORDS CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF DESCRIPTION Does not do anything. Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key. Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
Clears all oscillography records. Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either ON or OFF.
B.2.4 FUNCTION CODE 06H: STORE SINGLE SETTING This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17 dec). Table B6: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo DATA - hi DATA - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo DATA - hi DATA - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD
GE Multilin
B-5
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
APPENDIX B B.2.5 FUNCTION CODE 10H: STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to slave device 11h (17 dec). Table B7: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high order byte DATA #1 - low order byte DATA #2 - high order byte DATA #2 - low order byte CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 04 00 C8 00 01 12 62 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXMAPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 07 64
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order bit of the function code set to 1. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11. Table B8: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 39 CD F2 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE ERROR CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 B9 01 93 95
B-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B B.3FILE TRANSFERS
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING UR FILES USING MODBUS PROTOCOL
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)" and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from the UR relay, use the following steps: 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case sensitive. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The "position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
2.
3. 4.
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections. a) OBTAINING FILES FROM THE UR USING OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for example, TFTP or MMS). b) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format. c) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the OSCILLOGRAPHY section in the SETTINGS chapter for additional details. The Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available. The Oscillography_Number_of_Records setting specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography_Available_Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay. Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography_Clear_Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers and Oscillography_Available_Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography_Last_Cleared_Date to the present date and time. To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames: OSCnnnn.CFG OSCnnn.DAT
d) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename: EVT.TXT
GE Multilin
B-7
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename: EVTnnn.TXT (replace "nnn" with the desired starting record number)
APPENDIX B
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of "0" removes COMMAND password protection. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002. These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" PASSWORD SECURITY menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa. To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware. COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password, and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled. COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
B-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B B.4MEMORY MAPPING
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B9: Modbus Memory Map (Sheet 1 of 26)

ADDR 0000 0002 0010 0020 0022 0040 0090 0093 00A0 00B0 00C0 0200 0204 0220 0248 0280 REGISTER NAME UR Product Type Product Version Serial Number Manufacturing Date Modification Number Order Code Ethernet MAC Address Reserved (13 items) CPU Module Serial Number CPU Supplier Serial Number Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) Self Test States (2 items) LED Column x State (10 items) Display Message Last Key Pressed Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 ------------0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 --0 to 42 0 to 38 UNITS ----------------------0 --------STEP 1 0.01 --1 1 ------------1 1 --1 1 FORMAT F001 F001 F203 F050 F001 F204 F072 F001 F203 F203 F203 F143 F501 F204 F530 F190 DEFAULT 0 1 "0" 0 0 "Order Code x " 0 0 (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (none) 0 (None) 0 (No key -- use between real key) 0 (Off) Product Information (Read Only)
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
Self Test Targets (Read Only) Front Panel (Read Only)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules) 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 040A 040B 040C 040D 040E 040F 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 041A 041B 041C 041D 041E Virtual Input x State ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 0 to 1 --1 F108
GE Multilin
B-9
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING Table B9: Modbus Memory Map (Sheet 2 of 26)
ADDR 041F 0900 1000 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 32 FlexState Bits (16 items) Element Operate States (64 items) Formatted user-definable displays (8 items) User Map Values (256 items) Target Sequence Number of Targets Target to Read Target Message Contact Input States (6 items) Virtual Input States (2 items) Contact Output States (4 items) Contact Output Current States (4 items) Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) Virtual Output States (4 items) Contact Output Detectors (4 items) Remote Device x States Remote Input States (2 items) Remote Devices Online Remote Device x StNum Remote Device x SqNum ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Direct Input States (6 items) Platform Direct Out Average Message Return Time 1 Platform Direct Out Average Message Return Time 2 Direct Device States Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status ...Repeated for module number 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 --ms ms ------1 1 1 1 1 1 F500 F001 F001 F500 F134 F134 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 ----------------------------------------1 1 --1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F001 F502 F200 F001 F001 F001 F001 F200 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F126 F003 F003 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
FlexStates (Read Only) 0 0 (none) 0 0 0 0 "." 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 0 Element States (Read Only)
User Displays Actuals (Read Only) 1080 1200 14C0 14C1 14C2 14C3 1500 1508 1510 1518 1520 1528 1530 1540 1542 1550 1551 1553 1555 1559 155D 1561 1565 1569 156D 1571 1575 1579 157D 1581 1585 1589 158D 15C0 15C8 15C9 15D0 1610 1611 1682 Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only) Element Targets (Read Only)
Element Targets (Read/Write) Element Targets (Read Only) Digital I/O States (Read Only)
Remote I/O States (Read Only)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
Platform Direct I/O States (Read Only) 0 0 0 0 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail)
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
B-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B Table B9: Modbus Memory Map (Sheet 3 of 26)

ADDR 2B00 2D00 2D80 2E00 2F00 2F80 3000 3001 3002 3004 3005 3011 3100 3200 3202 3203 3400 3402 3404 3406 3560 3570 4000 4002 4008 400A 4010 4011 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 407E 407F 4080 4083 4084 REGISTER NAME FlexStates, one per register (256 items) Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items) Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) Remote Input States, one per register (32 items) Oscillography Number of Triggers Oscillography Available Records Oscillography Last Cleared Date Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record Oscillography Force Trigger Oscillography Clear Data Name of file to read Character position of current block within file Size of currently-available data block Block of data from requested file (122 items) Events Since Last Clear Number of Available Events Event Recorder Last Cleared Date Event Recorder Clear Command Direct Device States, one per register (8 items) Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) Command Password Setting Setting Password Setting Command Password Entry Setting Password Entry Command Password Status Setting Password Status Flash Message Time Default Message Timeout Default Message Intensity Screen Saver Feature Screen Saver Wait Time Current Cutoff Level Voltage Cutoff Level COM1 minimum response time COM2 minimum response time Modbus Slave Address RS485 Com1 Baud Rate RS485 Com1 Parity RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 400000000 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.5 to 10 10 to 900 0 to 3 0 to 1 1 to 65535 0.002 to 0.02 0.1 to 1 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 1 to 254 0 to 11 0 to 2 UNITS --------------------------------------------------------s s ----min pu V ms ms ------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.1 10 10 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F108 F108 F108 F108 F155 F108 F001 F001 F050 F001 F126 F126 F204 F003 F001 F001 F003 F003 F050 F126 F155 F108 F003 F003 F003 F003 F102 F102 F001 F001 F101 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F112 F113
DEFAULT 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Offline) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 (No) (none) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 (Offline) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 10 300 0 (25 %) 0 (Disabled) 30 20 10 0 0 254 8 (115200) 0 (None)
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only) Expanded Digital I/O states (Read Only)
Expanded Remote I/O Status (Read Only)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write) Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
Event Recorder (Read Only)
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command) Expanded Platform Direct I/O Status (Read Only)
Passwords (Read/Write Command) Passwords (Read/Write Setting) Passwords (Read/Write)
Passwords (Read Only)
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
GE Multilin
B-11
ADDR 4085 4086 4087 4089 408B REGISTER NAME RS485 Com2 Baud Rate RS485 Com2 Parity IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Network Address NSAP Default GOOSE Update Time Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Link Monitor Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Link Monitor DNP Port DNP Address DNP Client Addresses (2 items) TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol TCP Port Number for the UCA/MMS Protocol TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol (zero means "automatic") (2 items) DNP Unsolicited Responses Function DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address Ethernet Operation Mode DNP User Map Function DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list DNP Current Scale Factor DNP Voltage Scale Factor DNP Power Scale Factor DNP Energy Scale Factor DNP Other Scale Factor DNP Current Default Deadband DNP Voltage Default Deadband DNP Power Default Deadband DNP Energy Default Deadband DNP Other Default Deadband DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period DNP Message Fragment Size DNP Client Address 3 DNP Client Address 4 DNP Client Address 5 DNP Communications Reserved (8 items) UCA Logical Device Name UCA Communications Reserved (16 items) TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Tx Period IEC Number of Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list IEC Current Default Threshold IEC Voltage Default Threshold IEC Power Default Threshold IEC Energy Default Threshold IEC Other Default Threshold IEC Communications Reserved (22 items) DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items) RANGE 0 to 11 0 to 2 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 --1 to 60 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 4 0 to 65519 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 60 1 to 255 0 to 65519 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 6 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 1 to 10080 30 to 2048 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 --0 to 1 1 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 6 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 58 UNITS ------------s ------------------------s ------------------------------min --------------------s ----------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F112 F113 F003 F003 F003 F074 F001 F102 F102 F177 F001 F003 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F192 F102 F001 F194 F194 F194 F194 F194 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F003 F003 F003 F001 F203 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F197
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 8 (115200) 0 (None) 56554706 4294966272 56554497 0 60 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (NONE) 1 0 502 20000 102 80 69 0 0 (Disabled) 5 10 1 0 (Half-Duplex) 0 (Disabled) 1 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 1440 240 0 0 0 0 "UCADevice" 0 2404 0 (Disabled) 0 60 1 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 0 0 (Not Used)
408D 4097 4098 4099 409A 409B 409C 40A0 40A1 40A2 40A3 40A4 40A5 40A7 40A8 40A9 40AA 40AB 40AC 40AD 40AE 40AF 40B0 40B1 40B2 40B3 40B4 40B5 40B6 40B7 40B8 40B9 40BA 40BC 40BE 40C0 40C8 40D0 40E0 40E1 40E2 40E3 40E4 40E5 40E6 40E7 40E8 40E9 40EA 4100
B-12
GE Multilin

ADDR 4168 4169 416B 41A0 41A2 41A4 41A6 41C0 41C1 41C2 41C3 41C4 41D0 4200 4260 4261 4280 4281 4282 4284 4286 4288 428A 428C 428E 4290 4292 4294 4296 4298 429A 429C 429E 42A0 42A2 42A4 42A6 42A8 42AA 42AC 42AE 42B0 42B2 42B4 42B6 42B8 42BA 42BC 42BE 42C0 REGISTER NAME Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function SNTP Server IP Address SNTP UDP Port Number RTC Set Time SR Date Format SR Time Format IRIG-B Signal Type Oscillography Number of Records Oscillography Trigger Mode Oscillography Trigger Position Oscillography Trigger Source Oscillography AC Input Waveforms Oscillography Analog Channel X (16 items) Oscillography Digital Channel X (63 items) Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED User LED type (latched or self-resetting) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 0 to 235959 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 2 1 to 64 0 to 1 0 to 100 0 to 65535 0 to 4 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 UNITS ------------------% ----------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F102 F003 F001 F050 F051 F052 F114 F001 F118 F001 F300 F183 F600 F300 F300 F300 F300 F127
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 123 0 0 0 0 (None) 15 0 (Auto Overwrite) 50 0 2 (16 samples/cycle) 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Self-Reset)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
Clock (Read/Write Command) Clock (Read/Write Setting)
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
GE Multilin
B-13
ADDR 42C2 42C4 42C6 42C8 42CA REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 Relay Programmed State Relay Name Terminal Nominal Frequency Terminal Reference Terminal Frequency Tracking Function FlexCurve A (120 items) FlexCurve B (120 items) Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) User display top line text User display bottom line text Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items) Reserved (7 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 User Programmable Pushbutton Function Programmable Pushbutton Top Line Prog Pushbutton On Text Prog Pushbutton Off Text Programmable Pushbutton Drop-Out Time Programmable Pushbutton Target User Programmable Pushbutton Events Programmable Pushbutton Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 0 to 2 ------0 to 60 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 --------s ------1 ------0.05 1 1 1 F109 F202 F202 F202 F001 F109 F102 F001 0 to 1 --25 to 60 0 to 23 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----0 to 65535 ------Hz ----ms ms ----------1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 ----1 --F133 F202 F001 F400 F102 F011 F011 F001 F202 F202 F001 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
42CC 42CE 42D0 42D2 42D4 42D6 42D8 42DA 42DC 42DE 43E0 43E1 4628 4629 4630 4800 48F0 4A00 4C00 4C0A 4C14 4C19 4C20 4C40 4C60 4C80 4CA0 4CC0 4CE0 4E00 4E01 4E0B 4E15 4E1F 4E20 4E21 4E22 4E24 4E48 4E6C 4E90 4EB4 4ED8 4EFC
Installation (Read/Write Setting) 0 (Not Programmed) "Relay-1" 60 0 1 (Enabled) 0 0 0 "" "" 0 0
B90 Power System (Read/Write Setting)
Flexcurve A (Read/Write Setting) Flexcurve B (Read/Write Setting) Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting) User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules) 2 (Disabled) (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B-14
GE Multilin

ADDR 4F20 4F44 4F68 4F8C 5000 5800 5801 5802 5803 5808 5810 5818 5820 5828 5830 5838 5840 5848 5850 5858 5860 5868 5870 5878 5880 5888 5890 5898 58A0 58A8 58B0 58B8 58C0 58C8 58D0 58D8 58E0 58E8 58F0 58F8 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 652A 652B 6530 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) Timer x Type Timer x Pickup Delay Timer x Dropout Delay Timer x Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Bus Zone X Function Bus Zone X Pickup Bus Zone X Low Slope Bus Zone X Low Bpnt Bus Zone X High Slope Bus Zone X High Bpnt Bus Zone X High Set Bus Zone X Seal In Bus Zone X Block Bus Zone X Events Bus Zone X Target Bus Zone X Supervision (B90 Only) Bus Zone X Trip (B90 Only) 0 to 1 0.05 to 2 15 to 100 1 to 4 50 to 100 4 to 30 0.1 to 99.99 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --pu % pu % pu pu s ----------1 0.001 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 60000 0 to 60000 0 to 65535 ----------1 1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting) F300 F129 F001 F001 F001 16384 0 (millisecond) 0 0 0 Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
Bus Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (4 modules) F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F102 F109 F300 F300 0 (Disabled) 100 25 200 60 800 1500 400 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Self-reset) 1 0
GE Multilin
B-15
ADDR 6531 6542 6553 65A0 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 CT Trouble x Function CT Trouble x Pickup CT Trouble x Delay CT Trouble x Target CT Trouble x Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 B90 Bus Zone x CT (24 items) B90 Bus Zone x Dir (24 items) B90 Bus Zone x Status (24 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 B90 UV x Function B90 UV x VT B90 UV x Pickup B90 UV x Min Voltage B90 UV x PKP Delay B90 UV x RST Delay B90 UV x Block B90 UV x Target B90 UV x Events B90 UV x Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 EFP x Function EFP x CT EFP x Pickup EFP x Breaker Open EFP x Breaker Delay EFP x Manual Close EFP x Pickup Delay EFP x Block EFP x Target EFP x Events EFP x Reserved ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 0 to 1 0 to 23 0 to 30 0 to 65535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 ------pu --s --s --------1 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 1 1 --F102 F400 F001 F300 F001 F300 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 to 1 0 to 11 0 to 3 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 ------pu pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 --F102 F400 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 to 23 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ------1 1 1 F400 F210 F300 0 to 1 0.02 to 2 1 to 60 0 to 2 0 to 1 --pu s ----1 0.001 0.1 1 1 F102 F001 F001 F109 F102 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
CT Trouble (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules) 0 (Disabled) 100 100 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
65A1 65A2 65A3 65A4 65A5 65AA 65AF 6A00 6A18 6A30 6A48 6A90 6AD8 6B30 6B31 6B32 6B33 6B34 6B35 6B36 6B37 6B38 6B39 6B3B 6B46 6B51 6B5C 6B67 6B72 6B7D 6B88 6B93 6B9E 6BA9 6BB4 6BB5 6BB6 6BB7 6BB8 6BB9 6BBA 6BBB 6BBC 6BBD 6BBE 6BBF 6BCA 6BD5
B90 Bus Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules) 0 0 (IN) 0
B90 Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 800 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
End of Fault Protection (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (24 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 1200 0 400 0 40 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B-16
GE Multilin

ADDR 6BE0 6BEB 6BF6 6C01 6C0C 6C17 6C22 6C2D 6C38 6C43 6C4E 6C59 6C64 6C6F 6C7A 6C85 6C90 6C9B 6CA6 6CB1 6CBC 6CBD 6CBE 6CBF 6CC0 6CC1 6CC2 6CC3 6CC6 6CD0 6CDA 6CE4 6CEE 6CF8 6D02 6D0C 6D16 6D20 6D2A 6D34 6D3E 6D48 6D52 6D5C 6D66 6D70 6D7A 6D84 6D8E 6D98 6DA2 6DAC 6DB6 6DC0 6DCA REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 Isolator x Function Isolator x Open Isolator x Closed Isolator x Alarm Delay Isolator x Reset Isolator x Target Isolator x Events Isolator x Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 10 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --------s --------1 1 1 0.05 1 1 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Bus Replica Isolator (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules) F102 F300 F300 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 0 5 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-17
ADDR 6DD4 6DDE 6DE8 6DF2 6DFC REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 Terminal Current Magnitude Terminal Current Angle ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 Terminal Voltage Magnitude Terminal Voltage Angle ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 V 0.001 0.1 F060 F002 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 A 0.001 0.1 F060 F002 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
6E06 6E10 6E1A 6E24 6E2E 6E38 6E42 6E4C 6E56 6E60 6E6A 6E74 6E7E 6E88 6E92 6F00 6F02 6F03 6F06 6F09 6F0C 6F0F 6F12 6F15 6F18 6F1B 6F1E 6F21 6F24 6F27 6F2A 6F2D 6F30 6F33 6F36 6F39 6F3C 6F3F 6F42 6F45 6F48 6F4A 6F4B 6F4E 6F51 6F54 6F57 6F5A 6F5D
Terminal Current (Read Only) (24 modules) 0 0
Terminal Voltage (Read Only) (12 modules) 0 0
B-18
GE Multilin

ADDR 6F60 6F63 6F66 6F69 6F6C 6F6D 6F6E 6F70 6F72 6F74 6F76 6F78 6F7A 6F7C 6F7E 6F80 6F82 6F84 6F86 6F88 6F8A 6F8C 6F8E 6F90 6F92 6F94 6F96 6F98 6F9A 6F9C 6F9E 6F9F 6FA2 6FA5 6FA8 6FAB 6FAE 6FB1 6FB4 6FB7 6FBA 6FBD 6FC0 6FD0 6FD1 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 Terminal Current Primary Terminal Current Secondary ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 Terminal Voltage Ratio Terminal Voltage Secondary ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 B90 Function Terminal Frequency Terminal Tracking Frequency Bkr Fail x Cur Supv Function Bkr Fail x Cur Supv CT Bkr Fail x Cur Supv Amp Supv Pkp Bkr Fail x Cur Supv Amp Hiset Pkp Bkr Fail x Cur Supv Amp Loset Pkp Reserved (4 items) 0 to 1 2 to 90 2 to 90 0 to 1 0 to 23 0.001 to 30 0.001 to 30 0.001 to 30 0 to 65535 --Hz Hz ----pu pu pu --1 0.01 0.01 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 to 24000 50 to 240 :1 V 1 0.1 1 to 65000 0 to 1 A --1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
CT Terminal Settings (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules) F001 F123 1 0 (1 A)
VT Terminal Settings (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules) F060 F001 1 664
B90 Function (Read/Write Setting) F250 F001 F001 F102 F400 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 (Logic) 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 1050 1050 1050 0 Terminal Frequency (Read Only)
B90 Breaker Failure Current Supv (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (24 modules)
GE Multilin
B-19
ADDR 7009 7012 7014 701B 7024 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 Bkr Fail x Function Bkr Fail x Initiate Bkr Fail x Use Amp Supv Bkr Fail x Use Seal In Bkr Fail x Amp Supv OpA Bkr Fail x Amp Supv OpB Bkr Fail x Amp Supv OpC Bkr Fail x Use Timer1 Bkr Fail x Timer1 Pkp Dly Bkr Fail x Use Timer2 Bkr Fail x Timer2 Pkp Dly Bkr Fail x Use Timer3 Bkr Fail x Timer3 Pkp Dly Bkr Fail x Bkr Pos1 Bkr Fail x Bkr Pos2 Bkr Fail x Bkr Test On Bkr Fail x Amp Hiset OpA Bkr Fail x Amp Hiset OpB Bkr Fail x Amp Hiset OpC Bkr Fail x Amp Loset OpA Bkr Fail x Amp Loset OpB Bkr Fail x Amp Loset OpC Bkr Fail x Loset Time Dly Bkr Fail x Trip Dropout Time Dly Bkr Fail x Retrip Time Dly Bkr Fail x Block Bkr Fail x Target Bkr Fail x Events Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ----------------s --s --s ------------------s s s --------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 F102 F300 F126 F126 F300 F300 F300 F126 F001 F126 F001 F126 F001 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
702D 7036 703F 7048 7051 705A 7063 706C 7075 707E 7087 7090 7099 70A2 70AB 70B4 70BD 70C6 70CF 7100 7101 7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 710A 710B 710C 710D 710E 710F 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7118 7119 711A 711B 711C 7120 7140
B90 Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (24 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) 0 0 0 1 (Yes) 0 1 (Yes) 0 1 (Yes) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B-20
GE Multilin

ADDR 7160 7180 71A0 71C0 71E0 7200 7220 7240 7260 7280 72A0 72C0 72E0 7300 7320 7340 7360 7380 73A0 73C0 73E0 7400 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 740A 7414 741E 7428 7432 743C 7446 7450 745A 7464 746E 7478 7482 748E 7496 74A0 74B1 74B4 74BE 74C8 74D2 74DC 74E6 7500 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 B90 IOC Function B90 IOC CT B90 IOC Pickup B90 IOC Pickup Delay B90 IOC Reset Delay B90 IOC Block B90 IOC Target B90 IOC Events B90 IOC Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 B90 TOC Function 0 to 1 --1 0 to 1 0 to 23 0.001 to 30 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B90 IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (24 modules) F102 F400 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 1200 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B90 TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (24 modules) F102 0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
B-21
ADDR 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 REGISTER NAME B90 CT Setting B90 TOC Pickup B90 TOC Curve B90 TOC Multiplier B90 TOC Reset B90 TOC Block B90 TOC Target B90 TOC Events B90 TOC Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Actual Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 FlexState Parameters (256 items) Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) Setting Groups Block FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 - 6 (5 items) Setting Group Function Setting Group Events Current Setting Group FlexCurve C (120 items) FlexCurve D (120 items) --0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --------------ms ms --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F300 F001 F300 F300 F102 F102 F001 F011 F011 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 50000 --A A ----0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 1 --F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F001 RANGE 0 to 23 0.001 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 UNITS --pu --------------STEP 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F400 F001 F103 F001 F104 F300 F109 F102 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 1200 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
7506 7507 7508 7509 750C 7518 7524 7530 753C 7548 7554 7560 756C 7578 7584 7590 75A1 75A8 75B7 75C0 75CC 75D8 75E4 75F0 75FC 7608 7614 7E00 7E02 7E03 7E05 7E06 7E08 7E0C 7E18 7E24 8800 A000 A001 A002 A009 A00A A00B AC00 AC78
B90 Bus Actuals (Read Only) (4 modules) 0 0 0 0 1 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
Setting Groups (Read Only) Flexcurve C (Read/Write Setting) Flexcurve D (Read/Write Setting)
B-22
GE Multilin

ADDR AD00 AD01 AD02 AD03 AD04 AD05 AD06 AD0A AD14 AD1E AD28 AD32 AD3C AD46 AD50 AD5A AD64 AD6E AD78 AD82 AD8C AD96 B000 B001 B015 B016 B018 B01A B01B B01C B01D B020 B040 B060 B080 B0A0 B0C0 B0E0 B100 B120 B140 B160 B180 B1A0 B1C0 B1E0 C000 C006 C007 C008 C010 C018 C020 REGISTER NAME Latch x Function Latch x Type Latch x Set Latch x Reset Latch x Target Latch x Events Latch x Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Digital Element x Function Digital Element x Name Digital Element x Input Digital Element x Pickup Delay Digital Element x Reset Delay Digital Element x Block Digital Element x Target Digital Element x Events Digital Element x Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Contact Input x Name Contact Input x Events Contact Input x Debounce Time ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 --0 to 1 0 to 16 ----ms --1 0.5 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --------s s --------1 --1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 --RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --UNITS --------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 ---
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F102 F519 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 (Reset Dominant) 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules) F102 F203 F300 F003 F003 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) "Dig Element 1 " 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) F205 F102 F001 "Cont Ip 1 " 0 (Disabled) 20
GE Multilin
B-23
ADDR C028 C030 C038 C040 C048 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
C050 C058 C060 C068 C070 C078 C080 C088 C090 C098 C0A0 C0A8 C0B0 C0B8 C0C0 C0C8 C0D0 C0D8 C0E0 C0E8 C0F0 C0F8 C100 C108 C110 C118 C120 C128 C130 C138 C140 C148 C150 C158 C160 C168 C170 C178 C180 C188 C190 C198 C1A0 C1A8 C1B0 C1B8 C1C0 C1C8 C1D0 C1D8 C1E0
B-24
GE Multilin

ADDR C1E8 C1F0 C1F8 C200 C208 C210 C218 C220 C228 C230 C238 C240 C248 C250 C258 C260 C268 C270 C278 C280 C288 C290 C298 C2A0 C2A8 C2B0 C2B8 C2C0 C2C8 C2D0 C2D8 C2E0 C2E8 C2F0 C2F8 C600 C680 C690 C691 C69B C69C C69D C69E C69F C6A0 C6B0 C6C0 C6D0 C6E0 C6F0 C700 C710 C720 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 ...Repeated for module number 65 ...Repeated for module number 66 ...Repeated for module number 67 ...Repeated for module number 68 ...Repeated for module number 69 ...Repeated for module number 70 ...Repeated for module number 71 ...Repeated for module number 72 ...Repeated for module number 73 ...Repeated for module number 74 ...Repeated for module number 75 ...Repeated for module number 76 ...Repeated for module number 77 ...Repeated for module number 78 ...Repeated for module number 79 ...Repeated for module number 80 ...Repeated for module number 81 ...Repeated for module number 82 ...Repeated for module number 83 ...Repeated for module number 84 ...Repeated for module number 85 ...Repeated for module number 86 ...Repeated for module number 87 ...Repeated for module number 88 ...Repeated for module number 89 ...Repeated for module number 90 ...Repeated for module number 91 ...Repeated for module number 92 ...Repeated for module number 93 ...Repeated for module number 94 ...Repeated for module number 95 ...Repeated for module number 96 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout Virtual Input x Function Virtual Input x Name Virtual Input x Programmed Type Virtual Input x Events Virtual Input x UCA SBOClass Virtual Input x UCA SBOEna Virtual Input x Reserved ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 0 to 3 1 to 60 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 2 0 to 1 ----s --------------1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting) F128 F001 F102 F205 F127 F102 F001 F102 F001 1 (33 Vdc) 30 0 (Disabled) "Virt Ip 1 " 0 (Latched) 0 (Disabled) 1 0 (Disabled) 0 Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting) Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
GE Multilin
B-25
ADDR C730 C740 C750 C760 C770 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Virtual Output x Name Virtual Output x Events Virtual Output x Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 --0 to 1 ----------1 --F205 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
C780 C790 C7A0 C7B0 C7C0 C7D0 C7E0 C7F0 C800 C810 C820 C830 C840 C850 C860 C870 C880 CC90 CC9A CC9B CCA0 CCB0 CCC0 CCD0 CCE0 CCF0 CD00 CD10 CD20 CD30 CD40 CD50 CD60 CD70 CD80 CD90 CDA0 CDB0 CDC0 CDD0 CDE0 CDF0 CE00 CE10 CE20 CE30 CE40 CE50 CE60 CE70
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules) "Virt Op 1 " 0 (Disabled) 0
B-26
GE Multilin

ADDR CE80 CE90 CEA0 CEB0 CEC0 CED0 CEE0 CEF0 CF00 CF10 CF20 CF30 CF40 CF50 CF60 CF70 CF80 CF90 CFA0 CFB0 CFC0 CFD0 CFE0 CFF0 D000 D010 D020 D030 D040 D050 D060 D070 D080 D280 D281 D290 D29A D29B D29C D29D D29E D2A0 D2B0 D2C0 D2D0 D2E0 D2F0 D300 D310 D320 D330 D340 D350 D360 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 Test Mode Function Force VFD and LED Contact Output x Name Contact Output x Operation Contact Output x Seal-In Reserved Contact Output x Events Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 0 to 1 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 1 ------------------1 1 --1 1 1 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting) F102 F126 F205 F300 F300 F001 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (No) "Cont Op 1 " 0 0 0 1 (Enabled) 0
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
GE Multilin
B-27
ADDR D370 D380 D390 D3A0 D3B0 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset Force Contact Input x State (96 items) Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 3 ------1 1 1 F300 F144 F131 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
D3C0 D3D0 D3E0 D3F0 D400 D410 D420 D430 D440 D450 D460 D470 D480 D490 D4A0 D4B0 D4C0 D4D0 D4E0 D4F0 D500 D510 D520 D530 D540 D550 D560 D570 D580 D590 D5A0 D5B0 D5C0 D5D0 D5E0 D5F0 D600 D610 D620 D630 D640 D650 D660 D670 D680 D800 D8B0 D910
Reset (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
B-28
GE Multilin

ADDR DB40 DB41 DB42 DB50 DB51 DB52 DB53 DB54 DB58 DB5C DB60 DB64 DB68 DB6C DB70 DB74 DB78 DB7C DB80 DB84 DB88 DB8C DB90 DB94 DB98 DB9C DBA0 DBA4 DBA8 DBAC DBB0 DBB4 DBB8 DBBC DBC0 DBC4 DBC8 DBCC DBD0 DBD4 DBD8 DBDC DBE0 DBE4 DBE8 DBEC DBF0 DBF4 DBF8 DBFC DC00 DC04 DC08 DC0C REGISTER NAME Direct Device ID Platform Direct I/O Ring Configuration Function Direct I/O Data Rate Direct Input x Device Number Direct Input x Number Direct Input x Default State Direct Input x Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 RANGE 1 to 8 0 to 1 64 to 128 0 to 8 0 to 96 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS ----kbps --------STEP 1 1 64 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F126 F001 F001 F001 F108 F102
DEFAULT 1 0 (No) 64 0 0 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled)
Platform Direct I/O (Read/Write Setting)
Platform Direct Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
GE Multilin
B-29
ADDR DC10 DC14 DC18 DC1C DC20 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 ...Repeated for module number 65 ...Repeated for module number 66 ...Repeated for module number 67 ...Repeated for module number 68 ...Repeated for module number 69 ...Repeated for module number 70 ...Repeated for module number 71 ...Repeated for module number 72 ...Repeated for module number 73 ...Repeated for module number 74 ...Repeated for module number 75 ...Repeated for module number 76 ...Repeated for module number 77 ...Repeated for module number 78 ...Repeated for module number 79 ...Repeated for module number 80 ...Repeated for module number 81 ...Repeated for module number 82 ...Repeated for module number 83 ...Repeated for module number 84 ...Repeated for module number 85 ...Repeated for module number 86 ...Repeated for module number 87 ...Repeated for module number 88 ...Repeated for module number 89 ...Repeated for module number 90 ...Repeated for module number 91 ...Repeated for module number 92 ...Repeated for module number 93 ...Repeated for module number 94 ...Repeated for module number 95 ...Repeated for module number 96 Direct Output x Operand Direct Output x Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 0 to 65535 0 to 1 ----1 1 F300 F102 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
DC24 DC28 DC2C DC30 DC34 DC38 DC3C DC40 DC44 DC48 DC4C DC50 DC54 DC58 DC5C DC60 DC64 DC68 DC6C DC70 DC74 DC78 DC7C DC80 DC84 DC88 DC8C DC90 DC94 DC98 DC9C DCA0 DCA4 DCA8 DCAC DCB0 DCB4 DCB8 DCBC DCC0 DCC4 DCC8 DCCC DD00 DD01 DD02 DD04 DD06 DD08 DD0A
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) 0 0 (Disabled)
B-30
GE Multilin

ADDR DD0C DD0E DD10 DD12 DD14 DD16 DD18 DD1A DD1C DD1E DD20 DD22 DD24 DD26 DD28 DD2A DD2C DD2E DD30 DD32 DD34 DD36 DD38 DD3A DD3C DD3E DD40 DD42 DD44 DD46 DD48 DD4A DD4C DD4E DD50 DD52 DD54 DD56 DD58 DD5A DD5C DD5E DD60 DD62 DD64 DD66 DD68 DD6A DD6C DD6E DD70 DD72 DD74 DD76 DD78 DD7A REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
B-31
ADDR DD7C DD7E DD80 DD82 DD84 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 ...Repeated for module number 65 ...Repeated for module number 66 ...Repeated for module number 67 ...Repeated for module number 68 ...Repeated for module number 69 ...Repeated for module number 70 ...Repeated for module number 71 ...Repeated for module number 72 ...Repeated for module number 73 ...Repeated for module number 74 ...Repeated for module number 75 ...Repeated for module number 76 ...Repeated for module number 77 ...Repeated for module number 78 ...Repeated for module number 79 ...Repeated for module number 80 ...Repeated for module number 81 ...Repeated for module number 82 ...Repeated for module number 83 ...Repeated for module number 84 ...Repeated for module number 85 ...Repeated for module number 86 ...Repeated for module number 87 ...Repeated for module number 88 ...Repeated for module number 89 ...Repeated for module number 90 ...Repeated for module number 91 ...Repeated for module number 92 ...Repeated for module number 93 ...Repeated for module number 94 ...Repeated for module number 95 ...Repeated for module number 96 Remote Device x ID ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Remote Input x Device Remote Input x Bit Pair Remote Input x Default State Remote Input x Events 1 to 16 0 to 64 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------1 1 1 1 F001 F156 F108 F102 ------F202 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
DD86 DD88 DD8A DD8C DD8E DD90 DD92 DD94 DD96 DD98 DD9A DD9C DD9E DDA0 DDA2 DDA4 DDA6 DDA8 DDAA DDAC DDAE DDB0 DDB2 DDB4 DDB6 DDB8 DDBA DDBC DDBE E000 E00A E014 E01E E028 E032 E03C E046 E050 E05A E064 E06E E078 E082 E08C E096 E100 E101 E102 E103
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules) "Remote Device 1 "
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) 1 0 (None) 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled)
B-32
GE Multilin

ADDR E104 E108 E10C E110 E114 E118 E11C E120 E124 E128 E12C E130 E134 E138 E13C E140 E144 E148 E14C E150 E154 E158 E15C E160 E164 E168 E16C E170 E174 E178 E17C E600 E601 E602 E604 E608 E60C E610 E614 E618 E61C E620 E624 E628 E62C E630 E634 E638 E63C E640 E644 E648 E64C E650 E654 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Remote Output DNA x Operand Remote Output DNA x Events Remote Output DNA x Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) F300 F102 F001 0 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-33
ADDR E658 E65C E660 E664 E668 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Remote Output UserSt x Operand Remote Output UserSt x Events Remote Output UserSt x Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 F300 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
E66C E670 E674 E678 E67C E680 E681 E682 E684 E688 E68C E690 E694 E698 E69C E6A0 E6A4 E6A8 E6AC E6B0 E6B4 E6B8 E6BC E6C0 E6C4 E6C8 E6CC E6D0 E6D4 E6D8 E6DC E6E0 E6E4 E6E8 E6EC E6F0 E6F4 E6F8 E6FC
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) 0 0 (Disabled) 0
B-34
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4.2 MODBUS MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS
F001 UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F040 UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F002 UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER) Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970.
F003 UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) High order word is stored in the first register. Low order word is stored in the second register.
F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050) First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January, 2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F004 UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) High order word is stored in the first register/ Low order word is stored in the second register.
F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050) First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx). Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm; Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Seconds 1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s) (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
F005 UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F006 UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F011 UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points) A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time value is stored.
F060 FLOATING_POINT IEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F070 HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
F012 DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING (unsigned 16-bit integer) MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the number of decimal points to display. Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is 12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F013 POWER_FACTOR PWR FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER) Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indicate leading.
F100 ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
GE Multilin
B-35
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F101 ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY 0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F109 ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION 0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F102 ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
F110 ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL 0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
F103 ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES bitmask curve shape 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IEEE Mod Inv IEEE Very Inv IEEE Ext Inv IEC Curve A IEC Curve B IEC Curve C IEC Short Inv IAC Ext Inv bitmask curve shape 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 IAC Very Inv IAC Inverse IAC Short Inv I2t Definite Time Flexcurve A Flexcurve B
F112 ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES bitmask value 0 1 2 3 300 1200 2400 4800 bitmask value 4 5 6 7 9600 19200 38400 57600 bitmask value 8 9 10 11 115200 14400 28800 33600
F113 ENUMERATION: PARITY 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
F104 ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE 0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
F114 ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE 0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
F105 ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT 0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
F117 ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS 0 = 172 cycles, 1 = 336 cycles, 2 = 718 cycles, 3 = 159 cycles
F106 ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION 0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
F118 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE 0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
F108 ENUMERATION: OFF/ON 0 = Off, 1 = On
B-36
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F119 ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS

mask value mask value mask value mask value
F126 ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE 0 = No, 1 = Yes
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 1.03 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.80
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
2.90 3.00 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 3.50 3.60 3.70 3.80 3.90 4.00 4.10 4.20 4.30 4.40 4.50 4.60 4.70 4.80 4.90 5.00 5.10 5.20 5.30 5.40 5.50 5.60 5.70 5.80
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
5.90 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 10.50 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.50 13.00 13.50 14.00 14.50 15.00 15.50 16.00 16.50 17.00 17.50 18.00 18.50 19.00 19.50 20.00 F134 ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL 0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a 0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed F133 ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE F131 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze F130 ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE 0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault 0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute F129 ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE F128 ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD 0 = 16 Vdc, 1 = 30 Vdc, 2 = 80 Vdc, 3 =140 Vdc 0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset F127 ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
F122 ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE 0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F135 ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION 0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
F123 ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY 0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
F136 ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS 0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles 3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F125 ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL 0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
GE Multilin
B-37
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F138 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE 0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F143 UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number) A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
F140 ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE, DISABLED 0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46A, 2 = Voltage 280V, 3 = Current 4.6A 4 = Current 2A, 5 = Notched 4.6A, 6 = Notched 2A
F144 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
F145 ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER F141 ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR bitmask 0 1 2 4 5 9 10 11 13 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31 error ANY SELF TESTS IRIG-B FAILURE DSP ERROR NO DSP INTERRUPTS UNIT NOT CALIBRATED PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN EQUIPMENT MISMATCH UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED SYSTEM EXCEPTION BATTERY FAIL PRI ETHERNET FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL EEPROM DATA ERROR SRAM DATA ERROR PROGRAM MEMORY WATCHDOG ERROR LOW ON MEMORY REMOTE DEVICE OFF ANY MINOR ERROR ANY MAJOR ERROR F146 ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 F142 ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE 0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause 12 definition EVENTS CLEARED OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIGGERED DATE/TIME CHANGED DEF SETTINGS LOADED TEST MODE ON TEST MODE OFF POWER ON POWER OFF RELAY IN SERVICE RELAY OUT OF SERVICE WATCHDOG RESET OSCILLOGRAPHY CLEAR REBOOT COMMAND
bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
null A B C D E F
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
G H I J K L M
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
N O P Q R S T
21 22 23 24 25 26
U V W X Y Z
B-38
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F151 ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION

bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
F156 ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS

bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NONE RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 RTD 11 RTD 12 RTD 13 RTD 14 RTD 15 RTD 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
RTD 17 RTD 18 RTD 19 RTD 20 RTD 21 RTD 22 RTD 23 RTD 24 RTD 25 RTD 26 RTD 27 RTD 28 RTD 29 RTD 30 RTD 31 RTD 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
RTD 33 RTD 34 RTD 35 RTD 36 RTD 37 RTD 38 RTD 39 RTD 40 RTD 41 RTD 42 RTD 43 RTD 44 RTD 45 RTD 46 RTD 47 RTD 48
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
NONE DNA-1 DNA-2 DNA-3 DNA-4 DNA-5 DNA-6 DNA-7 DNA-8 DNA-9 DNA-10 DNA-11 DNA-12 DNA-13 DNA-14 DNA-15 DNA-16 DNA-17 DNA-18 DNA-19 DNA-20 DNA-21
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
DNA-22 DNA-23 DNA-24 DNA-25 DNA-26 DNA-27 DNA-28 DNA-29 DNA-30 DNA-31 DNA-32 UserSt-1 UserSt-2 UserSt-3 UserSt-4 UserSt-5 UserSt-6 UserSt-7 UserSt-8 UserSt-9 UserSt-10 UserSt-11
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
UserSt-12 UserSt-13 UserSt-14 UserSt-15 UserSt-16 UserSt-17 UserSt-18 UserSt-19 UserSt-20 UserSt-21 UserSt-22 UserSt-23 UserSt-24 UserSt-25 UserSt-26 UserSt-27 UserSt-28 UserSt-29 UserSt-30 UserSt-31 UserSt-32
F152 ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP 0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3 4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6, 7 = Group 7, 8 = Group 8
F155 ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE 0 = Offline, 1 = Online
F166 ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
F167 ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE 0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4, 4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F168 ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 = Disabled, 1 = 2nd
F169 ENUMERATION: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 = Disabled, 1 = 5th
GE Multilin
B-39
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F170 ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET & GAIN TRANSDUCER I/O SELECTION 0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
F181 ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE 0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F171 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE 0 = dcmA IN, 1 = OHMS IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT
F183 ENUMERATION AC INPUT WAVEFORMS bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 definition Off 8 samples/cycle 16 samples/cycle 32 samples/cycle 64 samples/cycle
F172 ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS

bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot
0 1 2 3
F G H J
4 5 6 7
K L M N
8 9 10 11
P R S T
12 13 14 15
U V W X F185 ENUMERATION PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
F173 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 dcmA I/O range 0 to 1 mA 0 to 1 mA 1 to 1 mA 0 to 5 mA 0 to 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
F186 ENUMERATION MEASUREMENT MODE 0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
F190 ENUMERATION Simulated Keypress bitmask keypress 0 --use between real keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Decimal Pt Plus/Minus bitmask 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 keypress Value Up Value Down Message Up Message Down Message Left Message Right Menu Help Escape Enter Reset User 1 User 2 User 3
F174 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE 0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel, 2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
1 2 3 4 5 6
F175 ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
7 8 9 10 11 12
F177 ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT 0 = NONE, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485, 3 = FRONT PANEL-RS232, 4 = NETWORK
F192 ENUMERATION ETHERNET OPERATION MODE 0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
F180 ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND 0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
B-40
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask 40 41 A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000 42 43 F197 ENUMERATION DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Input Point Block Not Used Virtual Inputs 1 to 16 Virtual Inputs 17 to 32 Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 Virtual Outputs 17 to 32 Virtual Outputs 33 to 48 Virtual Outputs 49 to 64 Contact Inputs 1 to 16 Contact Inputs 17 to 32 Contact Inputs 33 to 48 Contact Inputs 49 to 64 Contact Inputs 65 to 80 Contact Inputs 81 to 96 Contact Outputs 1 to 16 Contact Outputs 17 to 32 Contact Outputs 33 to 48 Contact Outputs 49 to 64 Remote Inputs 1 to 16 Remote Inputs 17 to 32 Remote Devs 1 to 16 Elements 1 to 16 Elements 17 to 32 Elements 33 to 48 Elements 49 to 64 Elements 65 to 80 Elements 81 to 96 Elements 97 to 112 Elements 113 to 128 Elements 129 to 144 Elements 145 to 160 Elements 161 to 176 Elements 177 to 192 Elements 193 to 208 Elements 209 to 224 Elements 225 to 240 Elements 241 to 256 Elements 257 to 272 Elements 273 to 288 Elements 289 to 304 Elements 305 to 320 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Input Point Block Elements 321 to 336 Elements 337 to 352 Elements 353 to 368 Elements 369 to 384 Elements 385 to 400 Elements 401 to 406 Elements 417 to 432 Elements 433 to 448 Elements 449 to 464 Elements 465 to 480 Elements 481 to 496 Elements 497 to 512 Elements 513 to 528 Elements 529 to 544 Elements 545 to 560 LED States 1 to 16 LED States 17 to 32 Self Tests 1 to 16 Self Tests 17 to 32
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F194 ENUMERATION DNP SCALE
F200 TEXT40 40 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F201 TEXT8 8 CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE 4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F202 TEXT20 20 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F203 TEXT16 16 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
GE Multilin
B-41
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F500 UR_UINT16 PACKED BITFIELD First register indicates I/O state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB) corresponding to I/0 state 1-16. The second register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 17-32 (if required) The third register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 33-48 (if required). The fourth register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 49-64 (if required). The number of registers required is determined by the specific data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
F222 ENUMERATION TEST ENUMERATION
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F300 UR_UINT16 FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6 bit type) The FlexLogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value. The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD, where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE type, and D represents bits for the descriptor. The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix [PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range. [0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value [0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value [2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96) [3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96) [4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64) [6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64) [10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64) [11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64) [12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64) [13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64) [14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32) [28] INSERT (Via Keypad only) [32] END [34] NOT (1 INPUT) [36] 2 INPUT XOR (0) [38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 INPUTS) [40] OR (2-16 INPUTS) [42] AND (2-16 INPUTS) [44] NOR (2-16 INPUTS) [46] NAND (2-16 INPUTS) [48] TIMER (1-32) [50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 - 64) [52] SELF-TEST ERROR (See F141 for range) [56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1-8) [62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (See F146 for range) [64-127] ELEMENT STATES (Refer to Memory Map Element States Section)
F501 UR_UINT16 LED STATUS Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
F502 BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATES Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F504 BITFIELD 3 PHASE ELEMENT STATE bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 element state Pickup Operate Pickup Phase A Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Operate Phase A Operate Phase B Operate Phase C
F505 BITFIELD CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
F400 UR_UINT16 CT/VT BANK SELECTION bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 bank selection Card 1 Contact 1 to 4 Card 1 Contact 5 to 8 Card 2 Contact 1 to 4 Card 2 Contact 5 to 8 Card 3 Contact 1 to 4 Card 3 Contact 5 to 8
F506| BITFIELD 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate
F507 BITFIELD COUNTER ELEMENT STATE 0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
B-42
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask 10 11 0 = Operate 12 13 F511 BITFIELD 3 PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C 14 15 16 17 18 F515 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE 19 20 21 22 F516 ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE 0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA 23 24 25 26 27 F518 ENUMERATION FlexElement Units 0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes 28 29 Flash Message
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F509 BITFIELD SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
ENTRY MISMATCH - CODE NOT STORED PRESSED KEY IS INVALID HERE INVALID KEY: MUST BE IN LOCAL MODE NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED PLEASE ENTER A NON-ZERO PASSCODE NO ACTIVE TARGETS (TESTING LEDS) OUT OF RANGE - VALUE NOT STORED RESETTING LATCHED CONDITIONS SETPOINT ACCESS IS NOW ALLOWED SETPOINT ACCESS DENIED (PASSCODE) SETPOINT ACCESS IS NOW RESTRICTED NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED SETPOINT ACCESS DENIED (SWITCH) DATA NOT ACCEPTED NOT ALL CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN RESET DATE NOT ACCEPTED IRIGB IS ENABLED NOT EXECUTED DISPLAY ADDED TO USER DISPLAY LIST DISPLAY NOT ADDED TO USER DISPLAY LIST DISPLAY REMOVED FROM USER DISPLAY LIST
F600 UR_UINT16 FlexAnalog Parameter The 16-bit value corresponds to the modbus address of the value to be used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all the metering quantities used in protection)
MMI_PASSWORD_TYPE ENUMERATION Password types for display in password prompts bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 password type No MASTER SETTING COMMAND FACTORY
MMI_FLASH ENUMERATION Flash message definitions for Front-panel MMI bitmask 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Flash Message ADJUSTED VALUE HAS BEEN STORED ENTERED PASSCODE IS INVALID COMMAND EXECUTED DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN ADDED DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN REMOVED INPUT FUNCTION IS ALREADY ASSIGNED PRESS [ENTER] TO ADD AS DEFAULT PRESS [ENTER] TO REMOVE MESSAGE PRESS [ENTER] TO BEGIN TEXT EDIT MMI_SETTING_TYPE ENUMERATION Setting types for display in web pages bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 Setting Type Unrestricted Setting Master-accessed Setting Setting Command Factory Setting
GE Multilin
B-43
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B-44
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C UCA/MMSC.1UCA/MMS OVERVIEW
C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW C.1.1 UCA
The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference documents available from the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software libraries that describe the complete capabilities of the UCA. Following, is a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The reference document set includes: Introduction to UCA version 2 Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE) Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS UCA Version 2 Profiles
These documents can be obtained from http://www.ucausersgroup.org or ftp://www.sisconet.com/epri/subdemo/uca2.0. It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set. COMMUNICATION PROFILES: The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Reference Model. The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the "UCA Version 2 Profiles" reference document for details. The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a communication link. These addresses are set in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK menu. Note that the UR relay supports UCA operation over the TP4/CLNP or the TCP/IP stacks and also supports operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to two simultaneous connections. This is in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections. C.1.2 MMS The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to form objects and be mapped to MMS services. Refer to the GOMSFE and CASM reference documents for details. SUPPORTED OBJECTS: The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items, some of which are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relay supports the following GOMSFE objects: DI (device identity) GCTL (generic control) GIND (generic indicator) GLOBE (global data) MMXU (polyphase measurement unit) PBRL (phase balance current relay) PBRO (basic relay object) PDIF (differential relay) PDIS (distance) PDOC (directional overcurrent) PDPR (directional power relay) PFRQ (frequency relay) PHIZ (high impedance ground detector) PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay) POVR (overvoltage relay) PTOC (time overcurrent relay) PUVR (under voltage relay) PVPH (volts per hertz relay) ctRATO (CT ratio information) vtRATO (VT ratio information) RREC (reclosing relay) RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay) XCBR (circuit breaker)
UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
GE Multilin
C-1
C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:
APPENDIX C
Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information, using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported via the use of the UR Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferred between any UCA conforming devices. FILE SERVICES: MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of Oscillography, Event Record, or other files from a UR relay. COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES: The exact structure and values of the implemented objects can be seen by connecting to a UR relay with an MMS browser, such as the MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc. NON-UCA DATA:
The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed through the "UR" MMS domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain. a) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION & CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (PICS) The UR relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the following list of supported services is for server operation only:
NOTE
The MMS supported services are as follows: CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES: Initiate Conclude Cancel Abort Reject
VMD SUPPORT SERVICES: Status GetNameList Identify
VARIABLE ACCESS SERVICES: Read Write InformationReport GetVariableAccessAttributes GetNamedVariableListAttributes
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES: (none) SEMAPHORE MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none) DOMAIN MANAGEMENT SERVICES: GetDomainAttributes PROGRAM INVOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none) EVENT MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none)
C-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C JOURNAL MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none) FILE MANAGEMENT SERVICES: ObtainFile FileOpen FileRead FileClose FileDirectory
The following MMS parameters are supported: STR1 (Arrays) STR2 (Structures) NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 and STR2) - 1 VNAM (Named Variables) VADR (Unnamed Variables) VALT (Alternate Access Variables) VLIS (Named Variable Lists) REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)
b) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC) This section provides details of the UCA object models supported by the UR relay. Note that not all of the protective device functions are applicable to all UR relays. Table C1: DEVICE IDENTITY DI
NAME Name Class d Own Loc VndID M/O m o o o o m RWEC rw rw rw rw rw r
Table C2: GENERIC CONTROL GCTL

FC ST CO CF DC NAME BO<n> BO<n> BO<n> LN BO<n> CLASS SI SI SBOCF d d RWECS rw rw rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Generic Single Point Indication Generic Binary Output SBO Configuration Description for brick Description for each point
Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:

NOTE
GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points SI1 to SI32); includes SBO functionality.
Table C3: GENERIC INDICATOR GIND 1 to 6

FC ST DC RP NAME SIG<n> LN BrcbST CLASS SIG d BasRCB RWECS r rw rw DESCRIPTION Generic Indication (block of 16) Description for brick Controls reporting of STATUS
GE Multilin
C-3
APPENDIX C
Table C4: GENERIC INDICATOR GIND7

FC ST DC RP OBJECT NAME SI<n> LN SI<n> BrcbST SI d d BasRCB CLASS r rw rw rw RWECS DESCRIPTION Generic single point indication Description for brick Description for all included SI Controls reporting of STATUS
Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:

NOTE
GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points SIG1 to SIG6) GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points SIG1 to SIG4) GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points SIG1 to SIG2) GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points SIG1 to SIG4) GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points SIG1 to SIG2) GIND6 = Flexstates (16 total points SIG1 representing Flexstates 1 to 16) GIND7 = Flexstates (16 total points SI1 to SI16 representing Flexstates 1 to 16)
Table C5: GLOBAL DATA GLOBE

FC ST OBJECT NAME ModeDS LocRemDS ActSG EditSG CO CF RP CopySG IndRs ClockTOD GOOSE CLASS SIT SIT INT8U INT8u INT8U BOOL BTIME PACT RWECS r r r r w w rw rw DESCRIPTION Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthy The mode of control, local or remote (DevST) Active Settings Group Settings Group selected for read/write operation Selects Settings Group for read/write operation Resets ALL targets Date and time Reports IED Inputs and Ouputs
Table C6: MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) MMXU

FC MX OBJECT NAME V PPV A W TotW Var TotVar VA TotVA PF AvgPF Hz CF DC RP All MMXU.MX LN All MMXU.MX BrcbMX CLASS WYE DELTA WYE WYE AI WYE AI WYE AI WYE AI AI ACF d d BasRCB RWECS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Voltage on phase A, B, C to G Voltage on AB, BC, CA Current in phase A, B, C, and N Watts in phase A, B, C Total watts in all three phases Vars in phase A, B, C Total vars in all three phases VA in phase A, B, C Total VA in all 3 phases Power Factor for phase A, B, C Average Power Factor for all three phases Power system frequency Configuration of ALL included MMXU.MX Description for brick Description of ALL included MMXU.MX Controls reporting of measurements
Actual instantiation of MMXU objects is as follows:

NOTE
1 MMXU per Source (as determined from the product order code)
C-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
Table C7: PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

FC ST OBJECT NAME Out Tar FctDS PuGrp CO EnaDisFct RsTar RsLat DC LN ElementSt CLASS BOOL PhsTar SIT INT8U DCO BO BO d d RWECS r r r r w w w rw r DESCRIPTION 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated Targets since last reset Function is enabled/disabled Settings group selected for use 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled Reset ALL Elements/Targets Reset ALL Elements/Targets Description for brick Element state string
The following GOMSFE objects are defined by the object model described via the above table: PBRO (basic relay object) PDIF (differential relay) PDIS (distance) PDOC (directional overcurrent) PDPR (directional power relay) PFRQ (frequency relay) PHIZ (high impedance ground detector) PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay) POVR (over voltage relay) PTOC (time overcurrent relay) PUVR (under voltage relay) RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay) POVR (overvoltage) PVPH (volts per hertz relay) PBRL (phase balance current relay) Actual instantiation of these objects is determined by the number of the corresponding elements present in the UR as per the product order code.
NOTE
Table C8: CT RATIO INFORMATION ctRATO

OBJECT NAME PhsARat NeutARat LN CLASS RATIO RATIO d RWECS rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Primary/secondary winding ratio Primary/secondary winding ratio Description for brick (current bank ID)
Table C9: VT RATIO INFORMATION vtRATO

OBJECT NAME PhsVRat LN CLASS RATIO d RWECS rw rw DESCRIPTION Primary/secondary winding ratio Description for brick (current bank ID)
Actual instantiation of ctRATO and vtRATO objects is as follows:

NOTE
1 ctRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code). 1 vtRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).
GE Multilin
C-5
APPENDIX C
Table C10: RECLOSING RELAY RREC

FC ST OBJECT NAME Out FctDS PuGrp SG CO ReclSeq EnaDisFct RsTar RsLat CF ReclSeq LN ElementSt DC CLASS BOOL SIT INT8U SHOTS DCO BO BO ACF d d RWECS r r r rw w w w rw rw r DESCRIPTION 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated Function is enabled/disabled Settings group selected for use Reclosing Sequence 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled Reset ALL Elements/Targets Reset ALL Elements/Targets Configuration for RREC.SG Description for brick Element state string
Actual instantiation of RREC objects is determined by the number of autoreclose elements present in the UR as per the product order code.
NOTE
Also note that the SHOTS class data (i.e. Tmr1, Tmr2, Tmr3, Tmr4, RsTmr) is specified to be of type INT16S (16 bit signed integer); this data type is not large enough to properly display the full range of these settings from the UR. Numbers larger than 32768 will be displayed incorrectly. Table C11: Circuit Breaker XCBR
FC ST OBJECT NAME SwDS SwPoleDS PwrSupSt PresSt PoleDiscSt TrpCoil CO CF DC RP ODSw ODSwSBO LN brcbST CLASS SIT BSTR8 SIG SIT SI SI DCO SBOCF d BasRCB RWECS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Switch Device Status Switch Pole Device Status Health of the power supply The condition of the insulating medium pressure All CB poles did not operate within time interval Trip coil supervision The command to open/close the switch Configuration for all included XCBR.CO Description for brick Controls reporting of Status Points
Actual instantiation of XCBR objects is determined by the number of breaker control elements present in the UR as per the product order code.
NOTE
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the UR to detect "dead" connections. If there is no data traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the UR. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using UCA reporting, clients should configure BasRCB objects such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the UR will not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.
C-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104D.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard. 1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
System Definition Controlling Station Definition (Master) Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION: Point-to-Point Multiple Point-to-Point 3. PHYSICAL LAYER Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: 100 bits/sec. 200 bits/sec. 300 bits/sec. 600 bits/sec. 1200 bits/sec. Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec. 38400 bits/sec. 56000 bits/sec. 64000 bits/sec.
Multipoint Multipoint Star
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):

Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: 100 bits/sec. 200 bits/sec. 300 bits/sec. 600 bits/sec. 1200 bits/sec. Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec. 38400 bits/sec. 56000 bits/sec. 64000 bits/sec.
4.
LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Balanced Transmision Unbalanced Transmission Address Field of the Link: Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only) One Octet Two Octets Structured Unstructured Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin
D-1
APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission: The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows: A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows: 5. APPLICATION LAYER Transmission Mode for Application Data: Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion stanadard. Common Address of ADSU: One Octet
Two Octets
Information Object Address: One Octet
Structured Unstructured
Two Octets
Three Octets
Cause of Transmission: One Octet
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system. Selection of standard ASDUs: For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard. Process information in monitor direction cannot be
<1> := Single-point information

<2> := Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1 M_ME_NA_1 M_NE_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_NE_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_NE_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1 M_EP_TA_1 M_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_SP_NA_1
<3> := Double-point information

<4> := Double-point information with time tag
<5> := Step position information

<6> := Step position information with time tag
<7> := Bitstring of 32 bits

<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag
<9> := Measured value, normalized value

<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag
<11> := Measured value, scaled value

<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value

<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
<15> := Integrated totals

<16> := Integrated totals with time tag <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
<20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection
D-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D

M_ME_ND_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 M_ST_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_ME_TD_1 M_ME_TE_1 M_ME_TF_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TE_1 M_EP_TF_1
<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor

<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set <30> to <40> are used. Process information in control direction

<45> := Single command <46> := Double command <47> := Regulating step command <48> := Set point command, normalized value <49> := Set point command, scaled value <50> := Set point command, short floating point value <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1 C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1 C_SC_TA_1 C_DC_TA_1 C_RC_TA_1 C_SE_TA_1 C_SE_TB_1 C_SE_TC_1 C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used. System information in monitor direction
<70> := End of initialization

System information in control direction
M_EI_NA_1

<100> := Interrogation command <101> := Counter interrogation command <102> := Read command <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) <104> := Test command
C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NA_1 C_RP_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1 C_TS_TA_1
<105> := Reset process command

<106> := Delay acquisition command
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a
GE Multilin
D-3
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL Parameter in control direction
APPENDIX D
<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value <113> := Parameter activation
PE_ME_NA_1 PE_ME_NB_1 PE_ME_NC_1 PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
<120> := File Ready <121> := Section Ready <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section <123> := Last section, last segment <124> := Ack file, ack section <125> := Segment <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction)
F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments (station-specific parameters) In the following table: Shaded boxes are not required. Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard. Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used. X if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU 45 INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
NO. <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8>
MNEMONIC M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1
3 X
5 X
10
11 X
12 X
13
20 to 36 X
37 to 41
D-4
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION 44
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
NO. <9> <10> <11> <12> <13> <14> <15> <16> <17> <18> <19> <20> <21> <30> <31> <32> <33> <34> <35> <36> <37> <38> <39> <40> <45> <46> <47> <48> <49>
MNEMONIC M_ME_NA_1 M_ME_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1 M_EP_TA_1 M_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_PS_NA_1 M_ME_ND_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 M_ST_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_ME_TD_1 M_ME_TE_1 M_ME_TF_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TE_1 M_EP_TF_1 C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1
10
11
12
13
20 to 36
37 to 41
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
45
GE Multilin
D-5
APPENDIX D
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
NO.
MNEMONIC C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1 C_SC_TA_1 C_DC_TA_1 C_RC_TA_1 C_SE_TA_1 C_SE_TB_1 C_SE_TC_1 C_BO_TA_1 M_EI_NA_1*) C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NA_1 C_RP_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1 C_TS_TA_1 P_ME_NA_1 P_ME_NB_1 P_ME_NC_1 P_AC_NA_1 F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 F_DR_TA_1*)
10
11
12
13
20 to 36
37 to 41
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
45
<50> <51> <58> <59> <60> <61> <62> <63> <64> <70> <100> <101> <102> <103> <104> <105> <106> <107> <110> <111> <112> <113> <120> <121> <122> <123> <124> <125> <126>
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
D-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D 6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Station Initialization:
Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Cyclic data transmission

Read Procedure:
Read procedure
Spontaneous Transmission:
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous: The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list.
Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1 Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1 Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1 Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project) Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1 Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1 Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Global Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

Clock synchronization:
Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)

Command transmission:
Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
GE Multilin
D-7
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL Transmission of integrated totals:
APPENDIX D
Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously Counter read Counter freeze without reset Counter freeze with reset Counter reset General request counter Request counter group 1 Request counter group 2
Request counter group 3 Request counter group 4

Parameter loading:
Threshold value Smoothing factor Low limit for transmission of measured values High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

Test procedure:
Test procedure
File transfer: File transfer in monitor direction:
Transparent file Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment Transmission of sequences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Transparent file
Background scan:
Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay: Acquisition of transmission delay
D-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE 30 s 15 s 10 s 20 s REMARKS Timeout of connection establishment Timeout of send or test APDUs
SELECTED VALUE 120 s 15 s 10 s 20 s
t0 t1 t2 t3
Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE 12 APDUs 8 APDUs REMARKS Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs SELECTED VALUE 12 APDUs 8 APDUs
k w
Maximum range of values k: Maximum range of values w: Portnumber:

PARAMETER Portnumber VALUE 2404
1 to 32767 (215 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
REMARKS In all cases
RFC 2200 suite: RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard.
Ethernet 802.3 Serial X.21 interface Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
GE Multilin
D-9
APPENDIX D D.1.2 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS
Table D1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 1 of 3)

POINT 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 DESCRIPTION TRM 1 Current Magnitude TRM 1 Current Angle TRM 2 Current Magnitude TRM 2 Current Angle TRM 3 Current Magnitude TRM 3 Current Angle TRM 4 Current Magnitude TRM 4 Current Angle TRM 5 Current Magnitude TRM 5 Current Angle TRM 6 Current Magnitude TRM 6 Current Angle TRM 7 Current Magnitude TRM 7 Current Angle TRM 8 Current Magnitude TRM 8 Current Angle TRM 9 Current Magnitude TRM 9 Current Angle TRM 10 Current Magnitude TRM 10 Current Angle TRM 11 Current Magnitude TRM 11 Current Angle TRM 12 Current Magnitude TRM 12 Current Angle TRM 13 Current Magnitude TRM 13 Current Angle TRM 14 Current Magnitude TRM 14 Current Angle TRM 15 Current Magnitude TRM 15 Current Angle TRM 16 Current Magnitude TRM 16 Current Angle TRM 17 Current Magnitude TRM 17 Current Angle TRM 18 Current Magnitude TRM 18 Current Angle TRM 19 Current Magnitude TRM 19 Current Angle TRM 20 Current Magnitude TRM 20 Current Angle TRM 21 Current Magnitude TRM 21 Current Angle TRM 22 Current Magnitude M_ME_NC_1 Points
Table D1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 2 of 3)

POINT 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 DESCRIPTION TRM 22 Current Angle TRM 23 Current Magnitude TRM 23 Current Angle TRM 24 Current Magnitude TRM 24 Current Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle Terminal Frequency Terminal Tracking Frequency B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag
2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042
D-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D Table D1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 3 of 3)

POINT 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 5000 5094 DESCRIPTION B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT Current Setting Group Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points
P_ME_NC_1 Points
M_SP_NA_1 Points 100 - 115 Virtual Input States[0] 116 - 131 Virtual Input States[1] 132 - 147 Virtual Output States[0] 148 - 163 Virtual Output States[1] 164 - 179 Virtual Output States[2] 180 - 195 Virtual Output States[3] 196 - 211 Contact Input States[0] 212 - 227 Contact Input States[1] 228 - 243 Contact Input States[2] 244 - 259 Contact Input States[3] 260 - 275 Contact Input States[4] 276 - 291 Contact Input States[5] 292 - 307 Contact Output States[0] 308 - 323 Contact Output States[1] 324 - 339 Contact Output States[2] 340 - 355 Contact Output States[3] 356 - 371 Remote Input x States[0] 372 - 387 Remote Input x States[1] 388 - 403 Remote Device x States 404 - 419 LED Column x State[0] 420 - 435 LED Column x State[1] C_SC_NA_1 Points 1100 1115 1116 1131 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required
M_IT_NA_1 Points Digital Counter 1 Value Digital Counter 2 Value Digital Counter 3 Value Digital Counter 4 Value Digital Counter 5 Value Digital Counter 6 Value Digital Counter 7 Value Digital Counter 8 Value
GE Multilin
D-11
APPENDIX D
D-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E APPENDIX E DNPE.1DNP DEVICE PROFILE
E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3) (Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section) Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin Device Name: UR Series Relay Highest DNP Level Supported: For Requests: Level 2 For Responses: Level 2 Device Function:
Master Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): Binary Inputs (Object 1) Binary Input Changes (Object 2) Binary Outputs (Object 10) Binary Counters (Object 20) Frozen Counters (Object 21) Counter Change Event (Object 22) Frozen Counter Event (Object 23) Analog Inputs (Object 30) Analog Input Changes (Object 32) Analog Deadbands (Object 34) Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Received: 292 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 240 Received: 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None Fixed at 2 Configurable

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
None Configurable
Never Always Sometimes Configurable
GE Multilin
E-1
E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 2 of 3) Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
APPENDIX E

Never Always When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Complete Appl. Fragment: Application Confirm: Complete Appl. Response: Others: Transmission Delay: Inter-character Timeout: Need Time Delay: Select/Operate Arm Timeout: Binary input change scanning period: Packed binary change process period: Analog input change scanning period: Counter change scanning period: Frozen counter event scanning period: Unsolicited response notification delay: Unsolicited response retry delay Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Queue Clear Queue No intentional delay 50 ms Configurable (default = 24 hrs.) 10 s 8 times per power system cycle 1s 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms configurable 0 to 60 sec.

None None None None

Fixed at 3 s Fixed at ____ Fixed at 4 s Fixed at ____
Variable Variable Variable Variable
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never Never Never

Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes
Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never Never Never Never
Always Always Always Always Always
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never
Always Always
Sometimes Sometimes
Configurable Configurable
Explanation of Sometimes: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both Pulse On and Latch On operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the On state. If the Virtual Input is set to "Self-Reset", it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. "Pulse Off" and "Latch Off" operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the "Off" state. "Trip" and "Close" operations both put the appropriate Virtual Input into the "On" state.
E-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 3 of 3) Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:
E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable
Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change

No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 20 Default Object:

Default Variation: 1 Point-by-point list attached

No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits (Counter 8) 32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9) Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes No
GE Multilin
E-3
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE E.2DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
APPENDIX E E.2.1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the UR in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 ( no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 ( no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01(start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) QUALIFIER CODES (HEX)
Binary Input
1 (read) 22 (assign class)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
Binary Input with Status (default see Note 1)
1 (read) 22 (assign class)
129 (response)
0 1
Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) request default variation) Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) Binary Input Change with Time (default see Note 1) Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 1 (read)
E
10
2 3
(parse only)
129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response 130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index)
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) request default variation)
Binary Output Status (default see Note 1)
1 (read)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
12
20
Note 1:
3 (select) 129 (response) echo of request 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, noack) 00, 01(start-stop) 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) (Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited qty) variation) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) (default see Note 1) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Control Relay Output Block
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 2 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter cont REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class)
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 129 (response)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
21
22
23
Note 1:
00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) (default see Note 1) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) to request default variation) 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) (default see Note 1) 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) (default see Note 1) 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-5
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 3 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 23
APPENDIX E
cont
30
E
32
34
Note 1:
RESPONSE QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) (default see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 5 short floating point 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06(no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08(limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28(index) 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) Time (default see Note 1) 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) without Time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) with Time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) (Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all) variation) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) (default see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read)
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 4 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband (default see Note 1) cont REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read)
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
2 (write)
Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) Deadband
50
Time and Date
1 (read)
Time and Date (default see Note 1)
1 (read) 2 (write)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07 (limited qty=1) 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 129 (response)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
129 (response)
129 (response)
52 60
2 0
Time Delay Fine Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
07 (limited qty)
(qty = 1)
E
06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)
1 2
Class 0 Data Class 1 Data
Class 2 Data
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)
Class 3 Data
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)
80 ------Note 1:
Internal Indications
00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart) see Note 3 No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-7
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS E.3DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.3.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 8)

POINT INDEX 0 1 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Virtual Input 17 Virtual Input 18 Virtual Input 19 Virtual Input 20 Virtual Input 21 Virtual Input 22 Virtual Input 23 Virtual Input 24 Virtual Input 25 Virtual Input 26 Virtual Input 27 Virtual Input 28 Virtual Input 29 Virtual Input 30 Virtual Input 31 Virtual Input 32 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 2 of 8)

POINT INDEX 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Output 1 Virtual Output 2 Virtual Output 3 Virtual Output 4 Virtual Output 5 Virtual Output 6 Virtual Output 7 Virtual Output 8 Virtual Output 9 Virtual Output 10 Virtual Output 11 Virtual Output 12 Virtual Output 13 Virtual Output 14 Virtual Output 15 Virtual Output 16 Virtual Output 17 Virtual Output 18 Virtual Output 19 Virtual Output 20 Virtual Output 21 Virtual Output 22 Virtual Output 23 Virtual Output 24 Virtual Output 25 Virtual Output 26 Virtual Output 27 Virtual Output 28 Virtual Output 29 Virtual Output 30 Virtual Output 31 Virtual Output 32 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
E-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 3 of 8)

POINT INDEX 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Output 33 Virtual Output 34 Virtual Output 35 Virtual Output 36 Virtual Output 37 Virtual Output 38 Virtual Output 39 Virtual Output 40 Virtual Output 41 Virtual Output 42 Virtual Output 43 Virtual Output 44 Virtual Output 45 Virtual Output 46 Virtual Output 47 Virtual Output 48 Virtual Output 49 Virtual Output 50 Virtual Output 51 Virtual Output 52 Virtual Output 53 Virtual Output 54 Virtual Output 55 Virtual Output 56 Virtual Output 57 Virtual Output 58 Virtual Output 59 Virtual Output 60 Virtual Output 61 Virtual Output 62 Virtual Output 63 Virtual Output 64 Contact Input 1 Contact Input 2 Contact Input 3 Contact Input 4 Contact Input 5 Contact Input 6 Contact Input 7 Contact Input 8 Contact Input 9 Contact Input 10 Contact Input 11 Contact Input 12 Contact Input 13 Contact Input 14 Contact Input 15 Contact Input 16 Contact Input 17 Contact Input 18 Contact Input 19 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 4 of 8)

POINT INDEX 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 NAME/DESCRIPTION Contact Input 20 Contact Input 21 Contact Input 22 Contact Input 23 Contact Input 24 Contact Input 25 Contact Input 26 Contact Input 27 Contact Input 28 Contact Input 29 Contact Input 30 Contact Input 31 Contact Input 32 Contact Input 33 Contact Input 34 Contact Input 35 Contact Input 36 Contact Input 37 Contact Input 38 Contact Input 39 Contact Input 40 Contact Input 41 Contact Input 42 Contact Input 43 Contact Input 44 Contact Input 45 Contact Input 46 Contact Input 47 Contact Input 48 Contact Input 49 Contact Input 50 Contact Input 51 Contact Input 52 Contact Input 53 Contact Input 54 Contact Input 55 Contact Input 56 Contact Input 57 Contact Input 58 Contact Input 59 Contact Input 60 Contact Input 61 Contact Input 62 Contact Input 63 Contact Input 64 Contact Input 65 Contact Input 66 Contact Input 67 Contact Input 68 Contact Input 69 Contact Input 70 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GE Multilin
E-9

POINT INDEX 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 NAME/DESCRIPTION Contact Input 71 Contact Input 72 Contact Input 73 Contact Input 74 Contact Input 75 Contact Input 76 Contact Input 77 Contact Input 78 Contact Input 79 Contact Input 80 Contact Input 81 Contact Input 82 Contact Input 83 Contact Input 84 Contact Input 85 Contact Input 86 Contact Input 87 Contact Input 88 Contact Input 89 Contact Input 90 Contact Input 91 Contact Input 92 Contact Input 93 Contact Input 94 Contact Input 95 Contact Input 96 Contact Output 1 Contact Output 2 Contact Output 3 Contact Output 4 Contact Output 5 Contact Output 6 Contact Output 7 Contact Output 8 Contact Output 9 Contact Output 10 Contact Output 11 Contact Output 12 Contact Output 13 Contact Output 14 Contact Output 15 Contact Output 16 Contact Output 17 Contact Output 18 Contact Output 19 Contact Output 20 Contact Output 21 Contact Output 22 Contact Output 23 Contact Output 24 Contact Output 25 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

POINT INDEX 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 NAME/DESCRIPTION Contact Output 26 Contact Output 27 Contact Output 28 Contact Output 29 Contact Output 30 Contact Output 31 Contact Output 32 Contact Output 33 Contact Output 34 Contact Output 35 Contact Output 36 Contact Output 37 Contact Output 38 Contact Output 39 Contact Output 40 Contact Output 41 Contact Output 42 Contact Output 43 Contact Output 44 Contact Output 45 Contact Output 46 Contact Output 47 Contact Output 48 Contact Output 49 Contact Output 50 Contact Output 51 Contact Output 52 Contact Output 53 Contact Output 54 Contact Output 55 Contact Output 56 Contact Output 57 Contact Output 58 Contact Output 59 Contact Output 60 Contact Output 61 Contact Output 62 Contact Output 63 Contact Output 64 Remote Input 1 Remote Input 2 Remote Input 3 Remote Input 4 Remote Input 5 Remote Input 6 Remote Input 7 Remote Input 8 Remote Input 9 Remote Input 10 Remote Input 11 Remote Input 12 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
E-10
GE Multilin

POINT INDEX 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 640 641 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 864 865 866 NAME/DESCRIPTION Remote Input 13 Remote Input 14 Remote Input 15 Remote Input 16 Remote Input 17 Remote Input 18 Remote Input 19 Remote Input 20 Remote Input 21 Remote Input 22 Remote Input 23 Remote Input 24 Remote Input 25 Remote Input 26 Remote Input 27 Remote Input 28 Remote Input 29 Remote Input 30 Remote Input 31 Remote Input 32 Remote Device 1 Remote Device 2 Remote Device 3 Remote Device 4 Remote Device 5 Remote Device 6 Remote Device 7 Remote Device 8 Remote Device 9 Remote Device 10 Remote Device 11 Remote Device 12 Remote Device 13 Remote Device 14 Remote Device 15 Remote Device 16 PHASE IOC1 Element OP PHASE IOC2 Element OP SETTING GROUP Element OP RESET Element OP FLEXELEMENT 1 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 2 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 3 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 4 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 5 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 6 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 7 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 8 Element OP LED State 1 (IN SERVICE) LED State 2 (TROUBLE) LED State 3 (TEST MODE) CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

POINT INDEX 867 868 869 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 921 922 923 925 926 NAME/DESCRIPTION LED State 4 (TRIP) LED State 5 (ALARM) LED State 6(PICKUP) LED State 9 (VOLTAGE) LED State 10 (CURRENT) LED State 11 (FREQUENCY) LED State 12 (OTHER) LED State 13 (PHASE A) LED State 14 (PHASE B) LED State 15 (PHASE C) LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND) BATTERY FAIL PRI ETHERNET FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL EPROM DATA ERROR SRAM DATA ERROR PROGRAM MEMORY WATCHDOG ERROR LOW ON MEMORY REMOTE DEVICE OFF Any Major Error Any Minor Error Any Self-Tests IRIG-B FAILURE DSP ERROR Not Used NO DSP INTERUPTS UNIT NOT CALIBRATED PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN EQUIPMENT MISMATCH UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED SYSTEM EXCEPTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GE Multilin
E-11
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.3.2 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate),6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINT LIST

POINT INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Virtual Input 17 Virtual Input 18 Virtual Input 19 Virtual Input 20 Virtual Input 21 Virtual Input 22 Virtual Input 23 Virtual Input 24 Virtual Input 25 Virtual Input 26 Virtual Input 27 Virtual Input 28 Virtual Input 29 Virtual Input 30 Virtual Input 31 Virtual Input 32
E-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS E.3.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time) Change Event Buffer Size: 10 Default Class for all points: 2 FROZEN COUNTERS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time) Change Event Buffer Size: 10 Default Class for all points: 2
Table E5: BINARY and FROZEN COUNTERS

POINT INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NAME/DESCRIPTION Digital Counter 1 Digital Counter 2 Digital Counter 3 Digital Counter 4 Digital Counter 5 Digital Counter 6 Digital Counter 7 Digital Counter 8 Oscillography Trigger Count Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. B90 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.
GE Multilin
E-13
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.3.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. This is a DNP requirement. The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34. When using the UR in DNP systems with limited memory, the ANALOG INPUT POINTS LIST below may be replaced with a user-definable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with the MODBUS USER MAP settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Modbus address of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog Input points, set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the "DNP Analog Input Points List" webpage, accessible from the "Device Information menu" webpage. After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the setting to take effect.
NOTE
Units for Analog Input points are as follows: Current: Voltage: Real Power: Reactive Power: Apparent Power: A V W var VA Energy Frequency: Angle: Ohm Input: RTD Input: Wh, varh Hz degrees Ohms degrees C
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms. Change Event Buffer Size: 800 Default Class for all Points: 1
Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4)

POINT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DESCRIPTION TRM 1 Current Magnitude TRM 1 Current Angle TRM 2 Current Magnitude TRM 2 Current Angle TRM 3 Current Magnitude TRM 3 Current Angle TRM 4 Current Magnitude
Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)

POINT 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 DESCRIPTION TRM 4 Current Angle TRM 5 Current Magnitude TRM 5 Current Angle TRM 6 Current Magnitude TRM 6 Current Angle TRM 7 Current Magnitude TRM 7 Current Angle
E-14
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4)

POINT 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 DESCRIPTION TRM 8 Current Magnitude TRM 8 Current Angle TRM 9 Current Magnitude TRM 9 Current Angle TRM 10 Current Magnitude TRM 10 Current Angle TRM 11 Current Magnitude TRM 11 Current Angle TRM 12 Current Magnitude TRM 12 Current Angle TRM 13 Current Magnitude TRM 13 Current Angle TRM 14 Current Magnitude TRM 14 Current Angle TRM 15 Current Magnitude TRM 15 Current Angle TRM 16 Current Magnitude TRM 16 Current Angle TRM 17 Current Magnitude TRM 17 Current Angle TRM 18 Current Magnitude TRM 18 Current Angle TRM 19 Current Magnitude TRM 19 Current Angle TRM 20 Current Magnitude TRM 20 Current Angle TRM 21 Current Magnitude TRM 21 Current Angle TRM 22 Current Magnitude TRM 22 Current Angle TRM 23 Current Magnitude TRM 23 Current Angle TRM 24 Current Magnitude TRM 24 Current Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)
POINT 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 DESCRIPTION TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle TRM X Voltage Magnitude TRM X Voltage Angle Terminal Frequency Terminal Tracking Frequency B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT B90 Bus Zone DMag B90 Bus Zone Diff Angle B90 Bus Zone RMag B90 Bus Zone Rest Angle B90 Bus Max CT Current Setting Group
GE Multilin
E-15
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F APPENDIX A MISCELLANEOUSA.1CHANGE NOTES
F.1 CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N 1601-0115-C1 1601-0115-C2 B30 REVISION 3.0X 3.0X RELEASE DATE 02 July 2002 18 November 2002 ECO URB-006 URB-011
F.1.2 CHANGES TO B90 MANUAL
Table F2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR B90 MANUAL REVISION C2

PAGE (C1) Title 2-8 2-9 3-9 3-11 10-1 F-2 PAGE (C2) Title 2-8 2-9 3-9 3-11 ----CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Remove Remove DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0115-C2. Updated ORDER CODES table to remove the 63 and 64 Digital I/O options Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to remove the 63 and 64 Digital I/O options. Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to remove the 64 and 64 modules. Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CT. Removed COMMISSIONING chapter; setpoints tables are available from URPC or can be downloaded from the GE Multilin website. Removed FIGURES AND TABLES section.
GE Multilin
F-1
F.2 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS A.2STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

A..................... ampere AC .................. alternating current A/D ................. analog to digital AE .................. accidental energization AE .................. application entity AMP ............... ampere ANSI............... American National Standards Institute AR .................. automatic reclosure AUTO ............. automatic AUX................ auxiliary AVG ................ average BER................ bit error rate BF................... breaker fail BFI.................. breaker failure initiate BKR................ breaker BLK ................ block BLKG.............. blocking BPNT.............. breakpoint of a characteristic CAP................ capacitor CC .................. coupling capacitor CCVT ............. coupling capacitor voltage transformer CFG................ configure / configurable .CFG............... file name extension for oscillography files CHK................ check CHNL ............. channel CLS ................ close CLSD.............. closed CMND ............ command CMPRSN........ comparison CO.................. contact output COM............... communication COMM............ communications COMP ............ compensated CONN............. connection CO-ORD......... coordination CPU................ central processing unit CRC ............... cyclic redundancy code CRT, CRNT .... current CT .................. current transformer CVT ................ capacitive voltage transformer D/A ................. digital to analog DC (dc)........... direct current DD .................. disturbance detector DFLT .............. default DGNST........... diagnostics DI.................... digital input DIFF ............... differential DIR ................. directional DISCREP ....... discrepancy DIST ............... distance DMD ............... demand DPO ............... dropout DSP................ digital signal processor DTT ................ direct transfer trip DUTT.............. direct under-reaching transfer trip EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute .EVT ............... file name extension for event recorder files EXT ................ extension F ..................... field FAIL................ failure FD .................. fault detector FDH................ fault detector high-set FDL ................ fault detector low-set FLA................. full load current FO .................. fiber optic FREQ ............. frequency FSK ................ frequency-shift keying FWD ............... forward G .................... generator GE .................. General Electric GND ............... ground
APPENDIX F F.2.1 ABBREVIATIONS

GNTR............. generator GOOSE.......... general object oriented substation event HARM ............ harmonic / harmonics HGF ............... high-impedance ground fault (CT) HIZ ................. high-impedance & arcing ground HMI ................ human-machine interface HYB ............... hybrid I...................... instantaneous I_0.................. zero sequence current I_1.................. positive sequence current I_2.................. negative sequence current IA ................... phase A current IAB ................. phase A minus B current IB ................... phase B current IBC................. phase B minus C current IC ................... phase C current ICA................. phase C minus A current ID ................... identification IEEE............... Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers IG ................... ground (not residual) current Igd.................. differential ground current IN ................... CT residual current (3Io) or input INC SEQ ........ incomplete sequence INIT ................ initiate INST............... instantaneous INV ................. inverse I/O .................. input/output IOC ................ instantaneous overcurrent IOV................. instantaneous overvoltage IRIG ............... inter-range instrumentation group IUV ................. instantaneous undervoltage K0 .................. zero sequence current compensation kA................... kiloAmpere kV................... kiloVolt LED................ light emitting diode LEO................ line end open LOOP............. loopback LPU................ line pickup LRA................ locked-rotor current LTC ................ load tap-changer M.................... machine mA ................. milliAmpere MAN............... manual / manually MMI................ man machine interface MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification MSG............... message MTA................ maximum torque angle MTR ............... motor MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase) MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A) MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B) MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C) MVAR............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) MVAR_A ........ MegaVar (phase A) MVAR_B ........ MegaVar (phase B) MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour MW ................ MegaWatt (total 3-phase) MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) MW_C............ MegaWatt (phase C) MWH.............. MegaWatt-Hour N .................... neutral N/A, n/a.......... not applicable NEG ............... negative NMPLT ........... nameplate NOM .............. nominal NTR ............... neutral O .................... over OC, O/C ......... overcurrent O/P, Op .......... output
F-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
OP .................. operate OPER ............. operate OPERATG...... operating O/S ................. operating system OSB................ out-of-step blocking OUT................ output OV .................. overvoltage OVERFREQ ... overfrequency OVLD ............. overload P..................... phase PC .................. phase comparison, personal computer PCNT ............. percent PF................... power factor (total 3-phase) PF_A .............. power factor (phase A) PF_B .............. power factor (phase B) PF_C .............. power factor (phase C) PFLL............... phase and frequency lock loop PHS................ phase PKP ................ pickup PLC ................ power line carrier POS................ positive POTT.............. permissive over-reaching transfer trip PRESS ........... pressure PROT ............. protection PSEL .............. presentation selector pu ................... per unit PUIB............... pickup current block PUIT ............... pickup current trip PUTT.............. permissive under-reaching transfer trip PWM .............. pulse width modulated PWR............... power R..................... rate, reverse REM ............... remote REV................ reverse RI.................... reclose initiate RIP ................. reclose in progress ROD ............... remote open detector RST ................ reset RSTR ............. restrained RTD................ resistance temperature detector RTU................ remote terminal unit RX (Rx) .......... receive, receiver s ..................... second S..................... sensitive SAT ................ CT saturation SBO................ select before operate SEL ................ select / selector / selection SENS ............. sensitive SEQ................ sequence SIR ................. source impedance ratio SRC................ source SSB ................ single side band SSEL .............. session selector STATS ............ statistics SUPN ............. supervision
F.2 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

SUPV ..............supervise / supervision SV ...................supervision SYNCHCHK....synchrocheck T......................time, transformer TC ...................thermal capacity TD MULT ........time dial multiplier TEMP..............temperature THD ................total harmonic distortion TOC ................time overcurrent TOV ................time overvoltage TRANS............transient TRANSF .........transfer TSEL...............transport selector TUC ................time undercurrent TUV.................time undervoltage TX (Tx)............transmit, transmitter U .....................under UC...................undercurrent UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture UNBAL............unbalance UR...................universal relay .URS ...............file name extension for settings files UV...................undervoltage V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz V_0 .................zero sequence voltage V_1 .................positive sequence voltage V_2 .................negative sequence voltage VA ...................phase A voltage VAB.................phase A to B voltage VAG ................phase A to ground voltage VARH ..............var-hour voltage VB ...................phase B voltage VBA.................phase B to A voltage VBG ................phase B to ground voltage VC...................phase C voltage VCA ................phase C to A voltage VCG ................phase C to ground voltage VF ...................variable frequency VIBR ...............vibration VT ...................voltage transformer VTFF...............voltage transformer fuse failure VTLOS ............voltage transformer loss of signal WDG ...............winding WH..................Watt-hour w/ opt ..............with option WRT................with respect to X .....................reactance XDUCER.........transducer XFMR..............transformer Z......................impedance
GE Multilin
F-3
F.3 WARRANTY A.3Warranty
APPENDIX F F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory. In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge. Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment. For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.
F-4
GE Multilin
INDEX
actual values ................................................................... 6-7 settings ......................................................................... 5-35 BUSBAR EXAMPLE ............................................................ 9-2
Numerics
10BASE-F communications options ................................................. 3-18 description .................................................................... 3-20 interface ........................................................................ 3-30 redundant option ........................................................... 3-18 settings ........................................................................... 5-8 specifications ................................................................ 2-13
C
CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-14 CHANGES TO MANUAL .....................................................F-1 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-22 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ........................... 5-75 CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-14 CLEAR RECORDS ............................................................. 7-1 CLOCK Modbus ........................................................................ B-13 setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2 settings ......................................................................... 5-14 COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1 COMMUNICATIONS 10BASE-F ..................................................... 3-18, 3-20, 5-8 channel ......................................................................... 3-22 connecting to the UR ................................................. 1-6, 1-7 CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-3 DNP ................................................................................ 5-9 dnp .........................................................................5-14, E-1 G.703 ............................................................................ 3-25 half duplex ...................................................................... B-1 HTTP ............................................................................. 5-12 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-12 inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-13 Modbus ...........................................5-9, 5-14, B-1, B-4, B-11 network ........................................................................... 5-8 overview .......................................................................... 1-8 RS232 ........................................................................... 3-18 RS485 ........................................................... 3-18, 3-19, 5-7 settings ................................... 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 5-11, 5-12, 5-14 specifications ................................................................. 2-13 TFTP ............................................................................. 5-12 UCA/MMS ............................5-11, 5-84, 5-86, 5-87, 5-88, C-1 web server ..................................................................... 5-12 COMTRADE ...................................................................... B-7 CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-14 CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1 CONTACT INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-2 dry connections ............................................................. 3-17 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-40 Modbus ............................................................... B-10, B-11 Modbus registers ................................................. B-23, B-25 module assignments ...................................................... 3-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-82 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 thresholds ..................................................................... 5-82 wet connections ............................................................. 3-17 wiring ............................................................................ 3-15 CONTACT OUTPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-3 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-40 Modbus ............................................................... B-10, B-11 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-27 module assignments ...................................................... 3-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-85 wiring ............................................................................ 3-15 CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-73 CONTROL POWER description ..................................................................... 3-10 specifications ................................................................. 2-12
A
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-6 AC CURRENT INPUTS ............................................2-12, 3-11 AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-12, 3-11 ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-10, 4-10 ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-49 ACTUAL VALUES product information .......................................................... 6-9 status .............................................................................. 6-2 ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-17 ALTITUDE ....................................................................... 2-14 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-1 APPLICATION EXAMPLES breaker trip circuit integrity ............................................ 5-76 busbar ............................................................................ 9-2 contact inputs ................................................................ 5-83 setting groups ............................................................... 9-11 slopes ............................................................................. 9-7 zoning ............................................................................. 9-4 APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-14 ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-37
B
B90 FUNCTION ................................................................. 5-4 BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4 BATTERY TAB ................................................................. 1-10 BIASED DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC ....................... 8-3 BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... E-12 BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3 BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-3 BREAKER FAILURE FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-39 logic .............................................................................. 5-58 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-20 sample configuration ..................................................... 5-60 settings .................................................................5-54, 5-55 specifications ................................................................ 2-10 BRIGHTNESS .................................................................... 5-6 BUS DIFFERENTIAL actual values ................................................................... 6-7 characteristic ................................................................. 5-50 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-39 logic .............................................................................. 5-53 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-15 settings .................................................................5-49, 5-52 specifications ................................................................ 2-10 theory of operation .......................................................... 8-1 BUS REPLICA ISOLATOR Modbus registers ........................................................... B-17 BUS REPLICA MECHANISM .............................................. 8-2 BUS ZONES
GE Multilin
INDEX
INDEX
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-3 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-12, 3-10 CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-14 CT BANKS settings ......................................................................... 5-27 CT RATIO MATCHING ....................................................... 8-2 CT TROUBLE FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-39 logic .............................................................................. 5-78 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-16 settings ......................................................................... 5-78 specifications................................................................. 2-10 CT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-11 CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-27 CURRENT ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-64 CURRENT METERING ....................................................... 6-7 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-18 CURVES definite time................................................................... 5-68 FlexCurves ................................................................. 5-28 I2T ................................................................................ 5-68 IAC ............................................................................... 5-67 IEC ............................................................................... 5-66 IEEE ............................................................................. 5-65 types ............................................................................. 5-64 Modbus ......................................................................... B-10 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-30 DIRECTIONAL PRINCIPLE ................................................ 8-6 DISPLAY .....................................................1-8, 4-7, 5-6, B-11 DNA-1 BIT PAIR ...............................................................5-88 DNP COMMUNICATIONS binary counters ............................................................. E-13 binary input points ........................................................... E-8 binary output points ....................................................... E-12 control relay output blocks ............................................. E-12 device profile document ................................................... E-1 frozen counters ............................................................. E-13 implementation table ....................................................... E-4 Modbus ......................................................................... B-12 settings ........................................................................... 5-9 user map .......................................................................5-11 DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA sample configuration ......................................................5-36 see ISOLATOR MONITORING
E
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................2-14 ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3 END FAULT PROTECTION logic ..............................................................................5-63 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-16 settings ..........................................................................5-62 specifications .................................................................2-10 EQUATIONS definite time curve ..........................................................5-68 It curves .......................................................................5-68 IAC curves .....................................................................5-67 IEC curves .....................................................................5-66 IEEE curves ...................................................................5-65 ETHERNET actual values ................................................................... 6-4 configuration ................................................................... 1-6 Modbus ......................................................................... B-10 settings ........................................................................... 5-8 specifications .................................................................2-13 EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ............................................ 4-5 EVENT RECORDER actual values ................................................................... 6-8 clearing ........................................................................... 7-1 Modbus .................................................................. B-7, B-11 specifications .................................................................2-11 with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2 EVENTS SETTING ............................................................ 5-3 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-6
D
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS .............................................B-35 DATA LOGGER Modbus .......................................................................... B-7 DATE ................................................................................. 7-2 DEFINITE TIME CURVE ................................................... 5-68 DESIGN ............................................................................. 1-3 DEVICE ID ....................................................................... 5-86 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT ......................................... E-1 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH .......................................... 2-14, 3-9 DIFFERENTIAL application of settings ...................................................... 9-7 biased ............................................................................. 8-3 bus ............................................... 2-10, 5-35, 5-49, 5-52, 6-7 restraining currents .......................................................... 8-3 DIGITAL ELEMENT FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-39 DIGITAL ELEMENTS application example ....................................................... 5-75 logic .............................................................................. 5-74 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-23 settings ................................................................ 5-74, 5-77 DIGITAL INPUTS see entry for CONTACT INPUTS DIGITAL OUTPUTS see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS DIMENSIONS ..................................................................... 3-1 DIRECT DEVICES actual values ................................................................... 6-5 Modbus .........................................................................B-11 DIRECT I/O configuration examples .................................................. 5-22 see entries for DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS settings ......................................................................... 5-22 DIRECT INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-5 Modbus ................................................................B-10, B-11 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-29 DIRECT OUTPUTS
F
F485 ................................................................................. 1-8 FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1 FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-6 FAST FORM-C RELAY ......................................................2-12 FAST TRANSIENT TESTING .............................................2-14 FAX NUMBERS ................................................................. 1-1 FEATURES ....................................................................... 2-1 FIRMWARE REVISION ...................................................... 6-9 FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2 FLASH MESSAGES ........................................................... 5-6 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
INDEX
ii
GE Multilin
INDEX
actual values ................................................................... 6-4 Modbus ................................................................ B-10, B-11 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-22 settings ......................................................................... 5-20 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST ...................................... A-1 FLEXCURVES Modbus ......................................................................... B-14 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-22 settings ......................................................................... 5-28 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 table ............................................................................. 5-28 FLEXLOGIC editing with URPC ........................................................... 4-1 equation editor .............................................................. 5-47 evaluation ..................................................................... 5-42 example ................................................................5-37, 5-42 example equation .......................................................... 5-73 gate characteristics ....................................................... 5-41 operands ...............................................................5-38, 5-39 operators ...................................................................... 5-41 rules ............................................................................. 5-42 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 timers ........................................................................... 5-47 worksheet ..................................................................... 5-44 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-47 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS .................................................... 5-47 Modbus ......................................................................... B-15 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ..................................... 5-93, B-28 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ................................. 5-93, B-28 FORCE TRIGGER .............................................................. 6-8 FORM-A RELAY high impedance circuits ................................................. 3-13 outputs ......................................................... 3-12, 3-13, 3-17 specifications ................................................................ 2-12 FORM-C RELAY outputs ..................................................................3-12, 3-17 specifications ................................................................ 2-12 FREQUENCY settings ......................................................................... 5-27 FREQUENCY METERING specifications ................................................................ 2-11 FREQUENCY TRACKING ................................................. 5-27 FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-27 FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-3 FUSE .............................................................................. 2-12
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................... 5-68 IAC CURVES ................................................................... 5-67 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL interoperability document ................................................ D-1 point list ....................................................................... D-10 settings ......................................................................... 5-12 IEC CURVES ................................................................... 5-66 IED .................................................................................... 1-2 IEEE CURVES ................................................................. 5-65 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ...................................................1-4 IN SERVICE INDICATOR ........................................... 1-10, 7-3 INPUTS AC current ..................................................................... 2-12 AC voltage ..................................................................... 2-12 contact inputs ...................................... 2-12, 3-15, 5-82, 5-93 IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-12, 3-20 remote inputs ........................................................ 5-86, 5-87 virtual ............................................................................ 5-84 INSPECTION CHECKLIST .................................................. 1-1 INSTALLATION communications ............................................................. 3-18 contact inputs/outputs .................................. 3-13, 3-15, 3-16 CT inputs ....................................................................... 3-11 RS485 ........................................................................... 3-19 settings ......................................................................... 5-26 VT inputs ....................................................................... 3-11 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT Modbus registers .......................................................... B-21 see entry for IOC INSULATION RESISTANCE .............................................. 2-14 INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................. 1-2 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 2-13 INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2 IOC FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-39 settings ......................................................................... 5-69 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 IP ADDRESS ...................................................................... 5-8 IRIG-B connection ..................................................................... 3-20 Modbus ........................................................................ B-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-14 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ................................................ 2-14 ISOLATOR MONITORING FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-39 settings ......................................................................... 5-79 specifications ................................................................. 2-10
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3-30 GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................... 5-67 GOMSFE ...........................................................................C-1 GOOSE ......................... 5-11, 5-86, 5-87, 5-88, 5-89, 5-90, 6-4 GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-49
K
KEYPAD ..................................................................... 1-9, 4-7
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1 HTTP PROTOCOL ........................................................... 5-12 HUMIDITY ....................................................................... 2-14
L
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2 Laser ............................................................................... 3-23 LED ................................................................................. 3-23 LED INDICATORS ....................................... 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 5-17 LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-13 LOGIC GATES ................................................................. 5-41 LOST PASSWORD ............................................................. 5-5
GE Multilin
iii
INDEX
INDEX
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ..............................2-14 OSCILLOGRAPHY actual values ................................................................... 6-8 clearing ........................................................................... 7-1 Modbus ......................................................... B-7, B-11, B-13 settings ..........................................................................5-15 specifications .................................................................2-11 with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2 OUTPUT LOGIC ................................................................ 8-8 OUTPUTS contact outputs ............................................ 3-13, 3-15, 5-85 control power .................................................................2-12 critical failure relay .........................................................2-12 Fast Form-C relay ..........................................................2-12 Form-A relay ....................................... 2-12, 3-12, 3-13, 3-17 Form-C relay ................................................ 2-12, 3-12, 3-17 remote outputs ...................................................... 5-88, 5-89 virtual outputs ................................................................5-85 OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ......................................5-64 OVERCURRENT CURVES definite time ...................................................................5-68 I2T .................................................................................5-68 IAC ................................................................................5-67 IEC ................................................................................5-66 IEEE ..............................................................................5-65
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-2 MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................... 6-9 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ......................................B-35 MENU HEIRARCHY .................................................... 1-9, 4-8 MENU NAVIGATION ................................................... 1-9, 4-8 METERING conventions ..................................................................... 6-6 frequency ...................................................................... 2-11 MIC .................................................................................. C-3 MMS see entry for UCA/MMS MODBUS data logger ..................................................................... B-7 event recorder ................................................................ B-7 exception responses ....................................................... B-6 execute operation ........................................................... B-5 flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-20 function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-4 function code 05h ........................................................... B-5 function code 06h ........................................................... B-5 function code 10h ........................................................... B-6 introduction .................................................................... B-1 memory map data formats ..............................................B-35 obtaining files ................................................................. B-7 oscillography .................................................................. B-7 passwords ...................................................................... B-8 read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-4 settings .................................................................. 5-9, 5-14 store multiple settings ..................................................... B-6 store single setting ......................................................... B-5 supported function codes ................................................ B-4 user map ....................................................................... 5-14 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................... 6-9 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER .......................................... 6-9 MODULES communications ............................................................. 3-18 contact inputs/outputs ...................................3-13, 3-15, 3-16 CT ................................................................................. 3-11 insertion .......................................................................... 3-2 order codes ..................................................................... 2-9 ordering ........................................................................... 2-9 power supply ................................................................. 3-10 VT ................................................................................. 3-11 withdrawal ....................................................................... 3-2 MOUNTING ........................................................................ 3-1
P
PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................... 3-1 PASSWORD SECURITY .................................................... 5-5 PASSWORDS changing ........................................................................4-11 lost password ..........................................................4-12, 5-5 Modbus .................................................................. B-8, B-11 overview ........................................................................1-10 security ........................................................................... 5-5 settings ........................................................................... 5-5 PC SOFTWARE see entry for URPC PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-3 PHASE ANGLE METERING ............................................... 6-6 PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................ 1-1 PICS ................................................................................. C-2 POWER SUPPLY description .....................................................................3-10 low range .......................................................................2-12 specifications .................................................................2-12 PRODUCT INFORMATION .......................................... 6-9, B-9 PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-4, 5-5 PRODUCTION TESTS ......................................................2-14 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3 PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-3 PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
N
NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-1 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES Modbus registers ...........................................................B-23 settings ......................................................................... 5-48 specifications................................................................. 2-11
R O
ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-41 OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-14 OPERATING TIMES ......................................................... 2-10 ORDER CODES ................................................... 2-8, 6-9, 7-2 ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-2 ORDERING .......................................................... 2-7, 2-8, 2-9 REAL TIME CLOCK ..........................................................5-14 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ..................................... 3-3 RECLOSER CURVES .......................................................5-31 REDUNDANT 10BASE-F ...................................................3-18 RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................4-10 RELAY ARCHITECTURE ..................................................5-37 RELAY MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 7-2 RELAY NAME ...................................................................5-26
INDEX
iv
GE Multilin
INDEX
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................... 1-10 REMOTE DEVICES actual values ................................................................... 6-3 device ID ....................................................................... 5-86 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-40 Modbus ................................................................ B-10, B-11 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-32 settings ......................................................................... 5-86 statistics ......................................................................... 6-4 REMOTE INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-2 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-40 Modbus ................................................................ B-10, B-11 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-32 settings ......................................................................... 5-87 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA-1 bit pair ............................................................... 5-88 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 UserSt-1 bit pair ....................................................5-89, 5-90 REMTOE OUTPUTS Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34 REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................... 2-9 RESETTING ............................................................5-40, 5-89 RESTRAINING CURRENTS ............................................... 8-3 REVISION HISTORY .......................................................... F-1 RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ...................................................... 2-14 RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-14 RS232 configuration ................................................................... 1-6 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 wiring ............................................................................ 3-18 RS422 configuration ................................................................. 3-27 timing ............................................................................ 3-29 two-channel application ................................................. 3-28 with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-30 RS485 communications ............................................................ 3-18 description .................................................................... 3-19 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 see entry for URPC SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 2-10 ST TYPE CONNECTORS .................................................. 3-20 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ............................................F-6 STATUS INDICATORS ....................................................... 4-4 SURGE IMMUNITY ........................................................... 2-14 SYSTEM FREQUENCY ..................................................... 5-27 SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................. 5-27
T
TARGET MESSAGES ......................................................... 7-3 TARGET SETTING ............................................................. 5-3 TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-3 TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................ 5-12 TEMPERATURE, OPERATING ......................................... 2-14 TERMINALS ....................................................................... 3-3 TEST MODE .................................................................... 5-93 TESTING force contact inputs ........................................................ 5-93 force contact outputs ...................................................... 5-93 lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2 self-test error messages ...................................................7-3 test mode ...................................................................... 5-93 TFTP PROTOCOL ............................................................ 5-12 THEORY OF OPERATION .................................................. 8-1 TIME .................................................................................. 7-2 TIME OVERCURRENT Modbus registers .......................................................... B-21 see entry for TOC TIMERS ........................................................................... 5-47 TOC FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-39 settings ......................................................................... 5-70 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 TRIP LEDs ....................................................................... 5-17 TROUBLE INDICATOR .............................................. 1-10, 7-3 TYPE TESTS ................................................................... 2-14 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ......................... 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8
S
SALES OFFICE ................................................................. 1-1 SATURATION DETECTOR ................................................. 8-7 SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4 SECURITY ........................................................................ 8-4 SELF-TESTS description ...................................................................... 7-3 error messages ............................................................... 7-4 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-40 SERIAL NUMBER .............................................................. 6-9 SERIAL PORTS ................................................................. 5-7 SETTING GROUPS ......................................... 5-39, 5-49, 5-73 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-22 SETTINGS, CHANGING ..................................................... 4-9 SIGNAL TYPES ................................................................. 1-3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ............................................. 2-1, 2-2 SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1 SNTP PROTOCOL Modbus ......................................................................... B-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-13 SOFTWARE see entry for URPC SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4 SOFTWARE, PC
U
UCA SBO TIMER for virtual inputs ............................................................. 5-84 UCA/MMS device ID ....................................................................... 5-86 DNA2 assignments ......................................................... 5-88 MIC ................................................................................ C-3 overview ......................................................................... C-1 PICS .............................................................................. C-2 remote device settings ................................................... 5-86 remote inputs ................................................................. 5-87 reporting ......................................................................... C-6 SBO timeout .................................................................. 5-84 settings ......................................................................... 5-11 UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................... 5-89, 5-90 UL APPROVAL ................................................................. 2-14 UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-39 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-16 settings ......................................................................... 5-71 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................... 5-26 UNPACKING THE RELAY ...................................................1-1 UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2
GE Multilin
INDEX
INDEX
URPC creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 installation ....................................................................... 1-5 introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 oscillography ................................................................... 4-2 overview .......................................................................... 4-1 requirements ................................................................... 1-5 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS example ........................................................................ 5-21 Modbus ................................................................B-10, B-14 settings ......................................................................... 5-21 specifications................................................................. 2-11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs custom labeling ............................................................... 4-6 description....................................................................... 4-5 Modbus .........................................................................B-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-17 specifications................................................................. 2-11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-40 Modbus .........................................................................B-14 settings ......................................................................... 5-18 specifications................................................................. 2-11 USERST-1 BIT PAIR ............................................... 5-89, 5-90 commands ...................................................................... 7-1 FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-40 logic ..............................................................................5-84 Modbus ........................................................................... B-9 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-25 settings ..........................................................................5-84 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-3 FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-40 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-26 settings ..........................................................................5-85 VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................5-27 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ...................................................2-14 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ......................................................5-71 VOLTAGE METERING ....................................................... 6-7 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 VT INPUTS .......................................................................5-27 VT WIRING ......................................................................3-11
W
WARRANTY ...................................................................... F-8 WEB SERVER PROTOCOL ...............................................5-12 WEBSITE .......................................................................... 1-1 WIRING DIAGRAM ........................................ 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8
V
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-14 VIRTUAL INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-2
Z
ZONING ............................................................................ 9-4
INDEX
vi B90 Bus Differential Relay GE Multilin

B90man c2

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B90man c2

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

g

B90 Revision: 3.0x

B90 Bus Differential Relay UR Series Instruction Manual

Manual P/N: 1601-0115-C2 (GEK-106241A) Copyright 2002 GE Multilin

Manufactured under an ISO9000 Registered system.

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.3 URPC SOFTWARE

1.5 USING THE RELAY

B90 Bus Differential Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS

4.1 URPC SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

B90 Bus Differential Relay

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS

B90 Bus Differential Relay

8.2 DYNAMIC BUS REPLICA AND RATIO MATCHING

8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRINCIPLE

9.4 BIASED CHARACTERISTIC BREAKPOINTS

9.5 SLOPES AND HIGH SET THRESHOLD

9.6 BUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION SETTINGS 9.7 ENHANCING RELAY PERFORMANCE

A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

B90 Bus Differential Relay

B. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.2 FUNCTION CODES

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE

E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE E.3 DNP POINT LISTS

F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.2 TABLES AND FIGURES

F.3 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS F.4 WARRANTY

B90 Bus Differential Relay

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Bus Differential Relay

Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual

B90D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A NONE 836709 D MAZB98000029 D Oct. 14, 1998

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

LAN Programming Device Operator Interface

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3URPC SOFTWARE

1.3 URPC SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1.3 URPC SOFTWARE

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC WITH THE B90

B90 Bus Differential Relay

1.3 URPC SOFTWARE

B90 Bus Differential Relay